COMPLIANCE TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE EIA REPORT

COMPLIANCE TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE EIA REPORT

S.

No. Condition Specifications Reference

1.

Year-wise production details since

1994 should be given, clearly stating

the highest production achieved in

any one year prior to 1994. It may

also be categorically informed

whether there had been any increase

in production after EIA Notification

1994 came into force, w.r.t. the

highest production achieved prior to

1994.

New Quarry project

Chapter 1,

Section 1.3

2.

A copy of the document in support of

the fact that the Proponent is the

rightful lessee of the mine should be

given.

Private land. Documents attached in

approved mining plan

Chapter 1,

Section 1.3

3.

All documents including approved

mine plan, EIA and Public Hearing

should be compatible with one

another in terms of the mine lease

area, production levels, waste

generation and its management,

mining technology etc. and should be

in the name of the lessee

Mining technology, Survey number,

production capacity, topsoil

generation, life of mine, geological

reserve, mineable reserve, mined out

quantity, water requirement are

detailed. Table 1-1 & Table 2-2.

Chapter 1,

Section 1.5

& Chapter 2.

Section 2.1

4.

All corner coordinates of the mine

lease area, superimposed on a High-

Resolution Imagery/ toposheet,

topographic sheet, geomorphology

and geology of the area should be

provided. Such an Imagery of the

proposed area should clearly show

the land use and other ecological

features of the study area (core and

buffer zone).

Google image of cluster condition,

index map of mining area, satellite

image of 10km radius, vicinity map,

regional and local geology, land use

land cover map is provided. Figure

1.1, Figure 1.3, Figure 1.5 and Figure

2.4, Figure 3.1, 3.2

Chapter 1,

Section 1.4,

1.5, Chapter

2, Section

2.2, 2.7 &

Chapter 3,

Section 3.3

5.

Information should be provided in

Survey of India Toposheet in

1:50,000 scale indicating geological

map of the area, geomorphology of

The topo-sheet map within 10 km

radius is provided as Annexure 7

Chapter 1,

Section 1.9

S.


land forms of the area, existing

minerals and mining history of the

area, important water bodies, streams

and rivers and soil characteristics.

6.

Details about the land proposed for

mining activities should be given

with information as to whether

mining conforms to the land use

policy of the State; land diversion

for mining should have approval

from State land use board or the

concerned authority.

Private land Chapter 1,

Section 1.3

7.

It should be clearly stated whether

the proponent company has well

laid down environment Policy

approved by its board of directors?

If so, it may be spelt out in the EIA

report with description of the

prescribed operating

process/procedures to bring into

focus any

infringement/deviation/violation of

the environmental or forest

norm/conditions? The hierarchical

system or administrative order of

the company to deal with the

environmental issues and for

ensuring compliance with the EC

conditions may also be given. The

system of reporting of

noncompliance / violations of

environmental norms to the Board

of Di rectors of the Company and /

or shareholders or stakeholders at

large, may also be detailed in the

proposed safeguard measures in

each case should also be provided.

Environment policies, Responsibility,

Environment management cell are

detailed in environment management

plan.

Chapter 10,

Section 10.3,

10.4 & 10.5

8.

Issues relating to Mine Safety,

including subsidence study in case

of underground mining and slope

study in case of open cast mining,

All safety measures are considered for

mining activities in the Environment

management Plan. Section 10.6

Chapter 10,

Section 10.6

S.


blasting study etc. should be

detailed. The proposed safeguard

measures in each case should also

be provided.

9.

The study area will comprise of 10

km zone around the mine lease from

lease periphery and the data

contained in the EIA such as waste

generation etc. should be for the life

of the mine / lease period.

Study area includes the 10km

surrounding of project area.

Liquid waste and solid waste

considered for management for the

mining period.

Chapter 2,

Section 2.7.9

10

Land use of the study area

delineating forest area, agricultural

land, grazing land, wildlife

sanctuary, national park, migratory

routes of fauna, water bodies,

human settlements and other

ecological features should be

indicated. Land use plan of the mine

lease area should be prepared to

encompass preoperational,

operational and post operational

phases and submitted. Impact, if

any, of change of land use should be

given

Land use map is provided and break-

up of land use is also provided. Figure

3.2

There are no sensitive or ecological

sensitive areas within 10 km radius.

Chapter 3

Section 3.2

11

Details of the land for any Over

Burden Dumps outside the mine

lease, such as extent of land area,

distance from mine lease, its land

use, R&R issues, if any, should be

given.

Topsoil/overburden management is

provided in the waste management

plan.

There are no displacement of people

from mine area hence R&R issues not

applicable

Chapter 2,

Section 2.7.9

& chapter 7,

Section 7.5

12

A Certificate from the Competent

Authority in the State Forest

Department should be provided,

confirming the involvement of

forest land, if any, in the project

area. In the event of any contrary

claim by the Project Proponent

regarding the status of forests, the

No forest land involved Chapter 2

S.


site may be inspected by the State

Forest Department along with the

Regional Office of the Ministry to

ascertain the status of forests, based

on which, the Certificate in this

regard as mentioned above be

issued. In all such cases, it would be

desirable for representative of the

State Forest Department to assist the

Expert

Appraisal Committee.

13

Status of forestry clearance for the

broken up area and virgin forest

land involved in the Project

including deposit ion of net present

value (NPV) and compensatory

afforestation (CA) should be

indicated. A copy of the forestry

clearance should also be furnished.

The lease Area does not involve any

forest, agriculture or grazing land. NA

14

Implementation status of

recognition of forest rights under

the Scheduled Tribes and other

Traditional Forest Dwellers

(Recognition of Forest Rights) Act,

2006 should be indicated.

The lease Area does not involve any

forest, agriculture or grazing land. NA

15

The vegetation in the RF / PF areas

in the study area, with necessary

details, should be given

The nearest forest is Periyar National

Park at 10.5km (table 2-2)

Chapter 2,

Section 2.2

16

A study shall be got done to

ascertain the impact of the Mining

Project on wildlife of the study area

and details furnished. Impact of the

project on the wildlife in the

surrounding and any other protected

area and accordingly, detailed

mitigative measures required,

should be worked out with cost

implications and submitted.

Impact of mining on ecological

environment is provided.

There is no Ecologically Sensitive or

Protected Area located within 10 km.

radius from the mine lease area.

Chapter 2,

Section 2.2

& chapter 4,

Section 4.7

17

Location of National Parks,

Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,

Wildlife Corridors, Ramsar site

Tiger/ Elephant Reserves/(existing

There is no National Parks,

Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,

Wildlife Corridors, Ramsar site

Tiger/Elephant Reserves are located

Chapter 2,

section 2.2

S.


as well as proposed), if any, within

10 km of the mine lease should be

clearly indicated, supported by a

location map duly authenticated by

Chief Wildlife Warden. Necessary

clearance, as may be applicable to

such projects due to proximity of

the ecologically sensitive areas as

mentioned above, should be

obtained from the Standing

Committee of National Board of

Wildlife and copy furnished.

within 10 km radius of the mine lease

area.

18

A detailed biological study of the

study area [core zone and buffer

zone (10 km radius of the periphery

of the mine lease)] shall be carried

out. Details of flora and fauna,

endangered, endemic and RET

Species duly authenticated,

separately for core and buffer zone

should be furnished based on such

primary field survey, clearly

indicating the Schedule of the fauna

present. In case of any scheduled I

fauna found in the study area, the

necessary plan along with budgetary

provisions for their conservation

should be prepared in consultation

with State Forest and Wildlife

Department and details furnished.

Necessary allocation of funds for

implementing the same should be

made as part of the project cost.

Detailed biodiversity study conducted

in the study area and listed the species

found.

There is no any RET species within

the study area

Chapter 3,

Section 3.9

19

Proximity to Areas declared as

'Critically Polluted' or the Project

areas likely to come under the

'Aravali Range', (attracting court

restrictions for mining operations),

should also be indicated and where

so required, clearance certifications

from the prescribed Authorities,

such as the SPCB or State Mining

There are no 'Critically Polluted' areas

in the proximity of the project site.

The project area is not under the

'Aravali Range'.

Chapter 2.

Section 2.2

S.


Department should be secured and

furnished to the effect that the

proposed mining activities could be

considered.

20

Similarly, for coastal projects, A

CRZ map duly authenticated by one

of the authorized agencies

demarcating LTL, HTL, CRZ area,

location of the mine lease w. r. t .

CRZ, coastal features such as

mangroves, if any, should be

furnished. (Note: The Mining

Projects falling under CRZ would

also need to obtain approval

of the concerned Coastal Zone

Management Authority).

Not applicable NA

21

R&R Plan/compensation details for

the Project Affected People (PAP)

should be furnished. While

preparing the R&R Plan, the

relevant State/National

Rehabilitation & Resettlement

Policy should be kept in view. In

respect of SCs /STs and other

weaker sections of the society in the

study area, a need based sample

survey, family-wise, should be

undertaken to assess their

requirements, and action programs

prepared and submitted accordingly,

integrating the sectoral programs of

line departments of the State

Government. It may be clearly

brought out whether the village(s)

located in the mine lease area will

be shifted or not. The issues relating

to shifting of village(s) including

their R&R and socio-economic

aspects should be discussed in the

Report

There is no displacement of people

from mine area hence R&R issues not

applicable.

The nearest Habitation is at 208 m

towards N side of proposed quarry

Chapter 7,

Section 7.2

22 Primary baseline data on ambient

air quality as per CPCB Notification

One season January to March 2020

study were conducted for four air

Chapter 3,

Section 3.4,

S.


of 2009, water quality, noise level,

soil and flora and fauna shall be

collected and the AAQ and other

data so compiled presented date-

wise in the EIA and EMP Report.

Site-specific meteorological data

should also be collected. The

location of the monitoring stations

should be such as to represent whole

of the study area and justified

keeping in view the pre-dominant

downwind direction and location of

sensitive receptors. There should be

at least one monitoring station

within 500 m of the mine lease in

the pre-dominant downwind

direction. The mineralogical

composition of PM10, particularly

for free silica, should be given.

quality sampling stations and water

quality stations, four noise sampling

stations and soil sampling stations.

3.5, 3.6 &

3.7, 3.8

23

Air quality modelling should be

carried out for predict ion of impact

of the project on the air quality of

the area. It should also take into

account the impact of movement of

vehicles for transportation of

mineral. The details of the model

used and input parameters used for

modelling should be provided. The

air quality contours may be shown

on a location map clearly indicating

the location of the site, location of

sensitive receptors, if any, and the

habitation. The wind roses showing

predominant wind directions may

also be indicated on the map.

Modelling studies were carried out

using AERMOD, a steady-state plume

model. It uses, processed

meteorological observations such as

wind speed, wind direction, humidity,

rainfall, temperature which is first pre-

processed by AERMET and along

with the emission characteristics it

estimates the concentration of the

particulate matter released by different

Sources.

Chapter 4,

Section 4.5

24

The water requirement for the

Project, its availability and source

should be furnished. A detailed

water balance should also be

provided. Fresh water requirement

for the Project should be indicated.

Water balance chart has been included

in the report

Chapter 2,

Section 2.7.8

S.


25

Necessary clearance from the

Competent Authority for drawl of

requisite quantity of water for the

Project should be provided.

Water source is tanker supply Chapter 2,

Section 2.7.8

26

Description of water conservation

measures proposed to be adopted in

the Project should be given. Details

of rainwater harvesting proposed in

the Project, if any, should be

provided

Drainage management included

Chapter 2,

Section 2.7.9

& Chapter 4,

Section 4.4

27

Impact of the Project on the water

quality, both surface and

groundwater, should be assessed

and necessary safeguard measures,

if any required, should be provided

All Impacts of the mining on water

environment is provided (both surface

and ground water). Mitigation

measures.

Chapter 4,

Section 4.4,

Section 4.9.3

& 4.9.4

28

Based on actual monitored data, it

may clearly be shown whether

working will intersect groundwater.

Necessary data and documentation

in this regard may be provided. In

case the working will intersect

groundwater table, a detailed Hydro

Geological Study should be

undertaken and Report furnished.

The Report inter-alia, shall include

details of the aquifers present and

impact of mining activities on these

aquifers. Necessary permission from

Central Ground Water Authority for

working below ground water and

for pumping of ground water should

also be obtained and copy furnished.

Hydro geological study is carried out

for area 1 km from the mine lease area

Chapter 4,

Section 4.4

29

Details of any stream, seasonal or

otherwise, passing through the lease

area and modification / diversion

proposed, if any, and the impact of

the same on the hydrology should

be brought out

No stream or perennial passing

through mine lease area.

Chapter 2,

Section 2.2

30

Information on site elevation,

working depth, groundwater table

etc. Should be provided both in

AMSL and bgl. A schematic

Highest and lowest elevation is 355m

& 270 m lowest bench for production

is 275m msl water level is more than

Chapter 2,

Section 2.2

S.


diagram may also be provided for

the same

6-8m below the general ground level

31

A time bound Progressive Greenbelt

Development Plan shall be prepared

in a tabular form (indicating the

linear and quantitative coverage,

plant species and time frame) and

submitted, keeping in mind, the

same will have to be executed up

front on commencement of the

Project. Phase-wise plan of

plantation and compensatory

afforestation should be charted

clearly indicating the area to be

covered under plantation and the

species to be planted. The details of

plantation already done should be

given. The plant species selected for

green belt should have greater

ecological value and should be of

good utility value to the local

population with emphasis on local

and native species and the species

which are tolerant to pollution

Greenbelt development plan with

native Plant Species is provided.

Chapter 3,

Section 3.9.7

& Chapter 4,

Section 4.7

& 4.9

32

Impact on local transport

infrastructure due to the Project

should be indicated. Projected

increase in truck traffic as a result of

the Project in the present road

network (including those outside the

Project area) should be worked out,

indicating whether it is capable of

handling the incremental load.

Arrangement for improving the

infrastructure, if contemplated

(including action to be taken by

other agencies such as State

Government) should be covered.

Project Proponent shall conduct

Impact of Transportation study as

per Indian Road Congress

Guidelines

Detailed traffic studies were

conducted and future traffic

anticipated. Mitigation measures

provided in the report.

Chapter 7,

Section 7.7

S.


33

Details of the onsite shelter and

facilities to be provided to the mine

workers should be included in the

EIA Report

Onsite shelter and facilities for 20

mine workers will be provided.

Chapter 7,

Section 7.3

34

Conceptual post mining land use

and Reclamation and Restoration of

mined out areas (with plans and

with adequate number of sections)

should be given in the EIA report

Reclamation details are provided and

Environment plan & sections are

provided in approved mining plan

Chapter 2,

Section 2.8

35

Occupational Health impacts of the

Project should be anticipated and

the proposed preventive measures

spelt out in detail. Details of pre-

placement medical examination and

periodical medical examination

schedules should be incorporated in

the EMP. The project specific

occupational health mitigation

measures with required facilities

proposed in the mining area may be

detailed

Occupational health and safety

measures provided

Chapter 4,

Section 4.9.8

36

Public health implications of the

Project and related activities for the

population in the impact zone

should be systematically evaluated

and the proposed remedial measures

should be detailed along with

budgetary allocations

Impact on socio-economic

environment is provided

Chapter 4 &

Chapter 10

37

Measures of socio economic

significance and influence to the

local community proposed to be

provided by the Project Proponent

should be indicated. As far as

possible, quantitative dimensions

may be given with time frames for

implementation

Impact on socio-economic

environment is provided

Chapter 4,

Section 4.9.8

& Chapter

10, Section

10.6.7

38

Detailed environmental

management plan (EMP) to mitigate

the environmental impacts which,

should inter-alia include the impacts

of change of land use, loss of

The Environment Management Plan

and the measures to mitigate the

impacts for each facet of Environment

are provided.

Chapter 10,

Section 10.6

S.


agricultural and grazing land, if any,

occupational health impacts besides

other impacts specific to the

proposed Project

39

Public Hearing points raised and

commitment of the Project

Proponent on the same along with

time bound Action Plan with

budgetary provisions to implement

the same should be provided and

also incorporated in the final

EIA/EMP Report of the Project

Public hearing proceedings is attached

as Annexure no 11 of in the final EIA.

Chapter 7,

Section 7.2

40

Details of litigation pending against

the project, if any, with direction

/order passed by any Court of Law

against the Project should be given.

There is no court case / litigation

pending against the lease / applicant of

the proposed lease in any court of law.

NA

41

The cost of the Project (capital cost

and recurring cost) as well as the

cost towards implementation of

EMP should be clearly spelt out

The project cost is 2.225 crores.

The total cost allocated for EMP is 17

lakhs.

Chapter 2,

Section 2.2

& Chapter

10, Section

10.9

42

A Disaster management Plan shall

be prepared and included in the

EIA/EMP Report

Risk and Disaster management plan

has been included

Chapter 7,

Section 7.3

43

Benefits of the Project if the Project

is implemented should be spelt out.

The benefits of the Project shall

clearly indicate environmental,

social, economic, employment

potential, etc

Benefit of project explained Chapter 8

44

Besides the above, the below

mentioned general points are also to

be followed:

-- General

instructions

a. Executive summary of EIA/EMP

report complied

b. All documents to be properly

referenced with index and

continuous page numbering

complied

c. Where data are presented in the complied

S.


Report especially in Tables, the

period in which the data

were collected and the sources

should be indicated

d. Project Proponent shall enclose

all the analysis/testing reports of

water, air, soil, noise etc. using the

MoEF&CC/NABL accredited

laboratories. All the original

analysis/testing reports should be

available during appraisal of the

Project

complied Annexure

No. 9

e. Where the documents provided

are in a language other than English,

an English translation should be

provided

- NA

f. The Questionnaire for

environmental appraisal of mining

projects as devised earlier by the

Ministry shall also be filled and

submitted

-- NA

g. While preparing the EIA report,

the instructions for the Proponents

and instructions for the Consultants

issued by MoEF&CC vide O.M.

No. J-11013/41/2006-IA.II(I) dated

4th August, 2009, which are

available on the website of this

Ministry, should be followed

complied

h. Changes, if any made in the basic

scope and project parameters (as

submitted in Form-I and the PFR for

securing the TOR) should be

brought to the attention of

MoEF&CC with reasons for such

changes and permission should be

sought, as the TOR may also have

to be altered. Post Public Hearing

changes in structure and content of

the draft EIA/EMP (other than

modifications arising out of the P.H.

process) will entail conducting the

Noted for compliance

S.


PH again with the

revised documentation

i. As per the circular no. J-

11011/618/2010-IA.II(I) dated

30.5.2012, certified report of the

status of compliance of the

conditions stipulated in the

environment clearance for the

existing operations of the project,

should be obtained from the

Regional Office of Ministry of

Environment, Forest and Climate

Change, as may be applicable

Noted for compliance

j. The EIA report should also

include (i) surface plan of the area

indicating contours of main

topographic features, drainage and

mining area, (ii) geological maps

and sections and (iii) sections of the

mine pit and external dumps, if any,

clearly showing the land features of

the adjoining area

complied

Chapter 2,

Figure 2.1,

2.2, 2.3, and

2.6, 2.7

*************

Executive Summary of

Environmental Impact Assessment Report

M/s Kavumkal Granites

Granite Building Stone Quarry

SITUATED AT

ATHIKKAYAM VILLAGE,

NARANAMOOZHY PANCHAYATH, RANNI TALUK,

PATHANAMTHITTA DISTRICT,

KERALA STATE

Area: 4.0262 Ha

MAXIMUM ANNUAL PRODUCTION – 185637.8 MT

TOTAL PRODUCTION CAPACITY – 1856378 MT

LIFE OF THE MINE – 10 YEARS

Project Proponent Mr. Kuriakose Sabu

(Managing Partner)


Chempanoli, Vechoochira P.O

Pathanamthitta-686511

Prepared by

SBA ENVIRO SYSTEMS PRIVATE LIMITED

A QCI-NABET Accredited Environmental Consulting Organization 201, DDA Local Shopping Centre, E-Block,

Vikaspuri, New Delhi- 110018, INDIA. +91-11-45118929, 28542059,Mob: 8089085335

Email: [email protected] Website: www.sbaenviro.in

December 2020

Granite Building Stone Quarry Project of M/s Kavumkal Granites Executive Summary

Prepared by SBA Enviro System Pvt Ltd P a g e | 2

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1. INTRODUCTION

The project proponent has identified the project site considering the mineral deposit (deposit of

granite building stone) in the area. The project is for a mine lease area of 4.0262Ha in Survey No.

781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam Village, Naranamoozhy

Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala.

The proposed lease area is a private consented land and no mining activities were carried out at

this area. The mined-out mineral will be used for construction works of nearby regions. Mining

Plan is prepared under the provisions of Kerala Minor Minerals Concession Rules, 2015 for

quarrying building stone with due consideration of environmental parameters, with the proposal of

total production capacity of 1856378 MT, in which the annual production is 185637.8 MT. The

expected life of mine is about 10 years. The average estimated cost of the project is Rs. 2.225

Crores. The project is expected to employ about 20 persons.

The project proponent has engaged M/s. SBA Enviro Systems Pvt ltd (NABET Accredited EIA

Consulting Organization (ACO)) to assess the environmental impacts due to the mining activities,

to suggest the mitigation measures, to assess the ecological damage due to the mining and to

prepare Environmental Impact Assessment & the Environmental Management Plan as per the

approved ToR granted by SEIAA, Kerala (No. 1259(A)/EC2/2019/SEIAA dated 12/11/2020). The

area of proposed quarry is 4.0292 ha, and around the proposed site there are three other quarries in

working. So, under the cluster condition, the effective area is greater than 5ha hence considered as

B1 category project. EIA Study has been carried out within 10 km radius of proposed mine lease

area including one season baseline monitoring from January 2020 to March 2020 (winter season).

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The proposal is for mining through open cast mechanized method, to sustainably extract Granite

Building Stones for the construction of projects. With an average annual production of 185637.8

MT, this quarry project will become one of the major sources of Granite Building Stone for

construction projects of region. The life of this quarry is estimated to be 10 years and is expected

to employ around 20 persons. The slope of the land at different sections is between 23o to 27o. The

highest and lowest elevation is 355m and 270m. The quarry operations will be semi-mechanized.

There will be single shift working of the mine with 3 Nos. excavators and 1 rock breaker. There is

other miscellaneous machinery attached to the mine. The NONEL blasting method will be

adopted for mining. This will reduce the impacts of the issues such as ground vibration, air over

pressure and fly rock nuisance.

The access road to the proposed site is 7.5 m wide. The nearest habitation is at 208 m from the

proposed lease boundary.



The total water requirement for the proposed quarry operations will be about 7 kLD in which (A)

3 kLD will be used for dust suppression, (B) 2 kLD for greenery development and (C) 1 kLD for

domestic purposes. Topsoil of 90585 tonnes & overburden of 92819 tonnes will be removed for

10 years for the quarry operations and this will be stored in the pre-designated plot for the same.

The topsoil will be used for refilling over the mined-out benches during the time of mine closure.

The runoff water will be managed with garland drains, delay pond, silt traps and checks dams

from which it overflows to natural drains.

There is no ecologically sensitive zone (National Park, Sanctuary, Habitat for Migratory Birds,

Tiger Reserve) within the 10 km radius of the project site.

3. DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

Study Area: As per the EIA Notification 2006 and the "Environmental Impact Assessment

Guidance Manual for Mining of Minerals" published by Ministry of Environment & Forests,

February, 2010, for carrying out an EIA study of a mining project, the mine lease area is called as

"core zone" and 10 km radius from the boundary limits of the mine lease area is called as "buffer

zone". The study area includes the "core zone" and "buffer zone". Under cluster condition the core

zone having 24.1906Ha area.

Study period: The study period for the EIA was from January 2020 to March 2020 (winter

season). The samples were collected and analyzed for various parameters through a National

Accreditation Board for Laboratories (NABL), accredited laboratory.

Meteorological parameters:

• Temperature – As per annual temperature variation, temperature is more during the

months of April and is less during January. The temperature for the study period (Jan-

Mar), the mean minimum & maximum temperature ranges from 22.78oC to 33.89oC during

the study period.

• Rainfall - The district receives an average annual rainfall of 3133.9mm.

• Wind rose - As per the wind rose diagram, the pre-dominant wind direction is from West

and north-west direction during the period of January 2020 to March 2020.

Air Quality

To establish the baseline status of the ambient air quality in the study area, the air quality was

monitored at sampling locations selected on the basis of the wind direction, sensitive population etc.,

during the study period. The results of the monitored data indicate that the ambient air quality of the



region in general is in conformity with respect to norms of the National Ambient Air Quality

(NAAQ) Standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), with present level of activities. All

mitigation measure should be adopted for the adverse impacts as detailed in chapter 6.

Water Quality

The baseline groundwater quality status in the region is established by analysing of 2 ground water

and 1 surface water sample. All the parameters of ground water (open well) are within the standards

as per IS:10500. All the parameters for surface water are within the standards as per IS: 2296, 1982.

Noise Levels

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at 4 locations in the study

area. The noise levels ranged between 50.6 to 53.1 dB (A) during day time and noise levels ranged

between 40.4 to 42.3 dB (A) during night time.

Ecology and Biodiversity

The area around the proposed site within 2 km is basically rubber plantation, so that Hevea brasiliens

(Rubber Plantation) is showing dominance. The proposed quarry mining might not create much

impact on both floral and faunal diversity of the proposed site. A very large area is already excavated

from the existing quarry near the proposed site. Vegetation exists only near to the adjoining areas of

the existing quarry. Both rubber plantation and natural vegetation exists near the excavating quarry.

Water body can be seen near the excavating quarry. There is a proper road facility to the proposed

site which can support all the transportation needs, as already a working quarry exists near the site.

The area is already disturbed due to the ongoing mining activity. Safety measure should be taken

maintain the natural balance around the areas which is likely to get changed due to the proposed

quarry mining.

Socio Economics

The proposed project extending over 4.0262 Hectares, the project site is located in Athikkayam

Village, Ranni Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State. The total Population of Athikkayam

Village 9548 and number of households’ village wise are 2477 as per 2011 census records.

4. ANTICIPATED IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

i. Impacts & Mitigation on Land and Soil

The original topography of the lease area shall be affected mainly due to mining operations,

dumping of waste, roads etc. A total quantity of 90585 tonnes of topsoil is proposed to be

removed during the mining operations. The topsoil excavated from the quarry will be



dumped / stacked separately at pre-determined place and subsequently will be utilized in

spreading over reclaimed areas for plantation as part of eco-restoration. Over burden and

Intercalated waste is to be handled during the quarrying operations is less as the entire area is

almost a rocky terrain. An estimated quantity of around 92819 tonnes of OB is required to be

handled during the proposed plan period to temporarily accommodate this waste material,

same will be utilized for formation of safety bunds all along the 7.5m safety zone, internal

road maintenance & green belt works.

ii. Impacts & Mitigation on Water Environment

There are no seasonal streams within the leasehold area. The rainwater flow, within the

mine area will collect and direct towards collection tanks by using garland drains. And the

overflow from the collection tanks will connect to public drains. The proposed silt traps

and check dams at the outlet will ensure drain out of clear from the mine.

The water table in this region is at an average depth of 4-5m from general surface level.

During the mining plan period, mining will be carried out from 355m RL to 270m RL above

MSL depth from the surface on the hillock, therefore the mining is not likely to encounter

groundwater at any time during the scheme period. There is no chemical having toxic

elements will be used for carrying out mining activity. Also, neither granite nor over burden

contains any kind of toxic element which can contaminate the water. To check the erosion

and prevent silt being carried during monsoon period, a series of silt traps would be

constructed at regular intervals.

iii. Impacts and Mitigation on Air Environment

The major reason for air pollution problem is fugitive dust emission, which prominently

depends on various factors like production capacity, machinery involved, drilling, blasting,

excavation, crushing operations and maintenance of various equipment and vehicle. Apart

from these, there will be other activities associated viz. transportation of Granite building

stone and waste, stocking facilities and dump management within the mine lease area that

may contribute to pollution.

Following measures shall be adopted to mitigate air pollution generated due to the mining

activities:

• Sharp drill bits will be used for drilling to reduce generation of dust.

• Drilling machines will be equipped with water spraying system to prevent dust to

get air borne.



• All the haul roads will be kept properly tarred/paved with sufficient width and

regular water spraying is done on the haul roads.

• Proper maintenance of vehicles will be carried out regularly for minimization of

generation of gaseous pollutants.

• Personal Protective Equipment like dust mask, ear plug/earmuff, goggles, safety

shoe, hand gloves will be provided to all employees

• Development of green belt/plantation will be done around lease boundary and other

places to arrest dust.

• Air and Dust monitoring shall be conducted at regular intervals as detailed in the

Environmental Monitoring Plan. Sampling shall be done 25m away from site

boundary during drilling, excavation, stockpiling activities and at post occupancy

stage with the help of MoEF/NABL approved laboratory.

• Tarpaulin covers shall be provided on trucks used for transportation of materials to

avoid fugitive dust emissions.

• Watering the areas exposed to wind erosion, avoiding material transportation on

dry haul roads, increasing moisture content of excavated material and Waste, etc.

• Total area exposed to wind action, minimizing route lengths and reducing

uncovered areas and pits through re-forestation.

• Emission control efficiency by water spraying program (intensity of the

applications and average time between spray applications).

iv. Impacts and Mitigation on Noise & Vibration Environment

With the mining operations for mine development like drilling, blasting, excavation,

loading, unloading, and transportation of material, it is imperative that noise levels would

increase unless appropriate abatement measures are planned and effectively carried out.

The noise and vibrations mainly generated by mining machineries; background noise

levels shall be kept in the range of 74 to 85 dB (A).

The noise generated from blasting will be for a very short duration and will be conducted

during such time such as at the end of shift or when most of the workers have been

withdrawn to safe places.

The blasting cause ground vibration. Vibration levels at the nearest habitation (at 208 m) is

estimated to be 3.7 mm/sec which is within the permissible Peak Particle Velocity (PPV)



value of 15 mm/sec for buildings /structures not belonging to the lease owner as per

DGMS circular no.7.2 of 1997.

v. Impacts and Mitigation on Biological Environment

No wildlife sanctuary or national park or biosphere reserves are located within the study

area. Due to hard exposed granite/Charnokite, comparatively there are fewer plantations

within the lease area and most of the plantation within lease area to be removed for

implementation of mining operation within 4.0262Ha lease area. The trees within the mine

area have to be cut for mining activities. The trees within the greenbelt, which will be

maintained undisturbed and additional plantation of about 1500 trees also proposed here.

No plantation outside the lease area shall be removed for mining or any mining related

activities. Plantation will be carried out in the lease area with a view to provide greenbelt

and to give an aesthetic look, for eliminating fugitive emissions and controlling impact of

noise etc. Species proposed for Greenbelt/ Plantation are, Mulluvenga, Puvam, Anjili,

Nilapaala, Maruth, Irul, Irippa, Karinochi, Unnam, Eeti, Njaval, Plavu, and Mavu.

vi. Impacts and Mitigation on Socio-economic Environment

As there are no habitations or settlements in the core zone area, no rehabilitation or

resettlement are involved. The existing environmental scenario in respect of ambient air

quality, water quality, noise levels, etc. show that all these environmental parameters are

within the permissible limits set by PCB. The most problematic environmental impact

experienced by residents living adjacent to quarries are those produced by blasting.

However, the adoption of NONEL method of blasting will minimize this impact. The

impact due to the project will be positive on socio-economic aspects. It will be ensured that

the buffer zone of the mine lease will be properly preserved environmentally in all respects

within sustainable limits through necessary monitoring.

Mitigation measures for any possible negative impacts on social economic environment,

• Regular water sprinkling will be carried on haulage roads and all dust prone areas.

• Sharp drill bits will be used to reduce the emission of air borne dust.

• Coir mating will be planned on waste dumps.

• Install appropriate dust control measurements to check air pollution.

• Organize quarterly health camps in the area to check the incidence of any respiratory

and other related health disorders.



5. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

Monitoring will be carried out at the site as per the norms of Central Pollution Control Board.

Environmental Monitoring Program will be conducted for various environmental components as

per conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance Letter issued by SEIAA and consent to

operate issued by Kerala State Pollution Control Board. The overall responsibility of monitoring

the above parameters lies with the environmental management cell. The Environmental Officer

shall be responsible for monitoring and compliance reporting. The monitoring shall be conducted

by NABL accredited laboratory. Also, the Environmental Officer would be monitoring of the

performance of pollution control measures proposed and appropriate steps needs to get the

performance of the pollution control methods.

6. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

Public Consultation - The project proponent is required to conduct public consultation as per as

per the NGT order dated 04/09/2018, F No L-11011/175/2018-I A- II (M) dated 12th December

2018 issued by MoEF&CC and the provisions of EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent

amendments. Draft EIA report and application for the conduction of public hearing was submitted

before KSPCB on 16/12/2020. The authority considered the application and the public hearing

was scheduled on 03/03/2021, and the notice for the hearing was published in the same newspaper

on 28.01.2020. Public hearing was conducted at Manimalethu Auditorium, Vehcoochira,

Pathanaththitta. The proceedings/minutes of public hearing and reply for the concerns raised is

attached as Annexure No.10.

Risk & Disaster Management - Risk analysis has been carried out to identify the activities and

materials considered hazardous and to prepare the emergency and disaster management plan for

the hazards and risks anticipated from opencast mechanized mining activity for building stone

mining activity. The risk assessment involves hazard identification, hazard analysis followed by

disaster management plan for the identified hazards. During mining activities, proper measures

will be taken to ensure safety at site. In order to handle disaster / emergency situations, an

organizational chart entrusting responsibility to various project personnel will be prepared with

their specific roles during emergency.

Social Impact Assessment - Community need assessments seek to gather accurate information

representative of the needs of a community. Assessments are performed prior to taking act ion and

are used to determine current situations and identify issues for action, establishing the essential

foundation for vital planning. Because of such employment prospects and enhancement of income

levels of local community, their lifestyle, conditions of living, educational and health status, etc.

will considerably improve. Besides, there are also benefits to the State and the Central



governments through financial revenues by way of royalty, tax, duties, etc. from this project

directly and also indirectly. From the above details, it is clear that the project operations will have

highly beneficial CER Activities project lessee will implement CER activities to the local

community around the project site. The CER schemes are identified to meet the specific needs and

requirement of the concerned group / person of any organization / Institutions. The lessee has

planned to spend around Rs.7 lakh as for various activities like providing fund to local needy poor

persons for Educational aid, Medical aid, etc.

Traffic Study: The vehicular traffic density survey was carried 8m wide Edamuri-Kothattukulam

road and Athikkayam-Vechoochira road. Proposed project will cause increase in commercial

vehicles as well as heavy trucks as a result traffic load will also increase on both roads. From the

traffic study results the current maximum hourly traffic volume in Edamuri-Kothattukulam road is

77.7 PCU and that in Athikkayam-Vechoochira road is 154.5PCU. Due to the implementation of

proposed project, the total number of trucks for transport of the building stone will be 50 trips /

day (maximum) for the proposed quarry. Considering the proposed quarry and quarry of Johnson

Rack, the traffic volume may increase by 39 PCU/hour on both roads. And also, for the anticipated

traffic volume, the Level of Service is excellent for both roads. Hence the road is safe for the

additional traffic.

Slope Stability: The proposed area is having hard rock terrain. The eastern higher elevation of site

having exposed rock and there is no topsoil above this portion. The site is having gradual slope

towards the western side. The most of the area having vegetation cover. However, the soil

thickness is minimum, and the rock strata is visible in between the region. The rock strata in the

site having a single hard rock formation. So, the terrain is stable and safe from any kind of slope

failure. The provision of 7.5m wide greenbelt zone also help as a barrier of further disturbance to

surroundings.

7. PROJECT BENEFITS

It is proposed that the socio-economic development work in the nearby area will be carried out by

the mine management to strengthen the social infrastructural needs of the villagers like education,

medical, drinking water for human beings and animals, road network, plantation, rain water

harvesting etc. The project would generate direct and indirect employment and preference will be

given to the locals. About 20 persons will get direct employment in the mine and also this project

would generate equal or a greater number of indirect employments. The operation of the project

also results in additional GST and State by way of royalty, taxes and duties.



8. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

The lessee will adopt Environmental Management System (EMS) which will assist mine

management to meet both current and future environmental requirements and challenges. EMS

will provide a structural view and control of the organization's environmental performance that

will be applied from planning and exploration to the mine closure. A Cell for Environment

Management within the mine, will take overall responsibility for co-ordination of the actions

required for environmental management and mitigation, and to monitor progress of the mitigative

measures and actions to be taken by the lessee.

The overall investment on the environmental safeguards and measures for successful monitoring

and implementation of pollution control measures as well as the eco-restoration and green area

development is prepared. The capital cost for Environmental Management Plan is Rs. 17 Lakhs.

9. CONCLUSION:

The proposed Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites, over an extent of 4.0262

Ha situated in Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam

Village, Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State.

The Environment Management Plan for the proposed quarry is formulated to reduce any possible

negative impacts on the environment and the local residents. Accordingly, the operation of the

quarry with the due implementation of the EMP is not likely to create any significant negative

impacts on the existing environmental set up of the area. This project will generate direct and

indirect employment in local region which will improve the economic status of the people in the

local area. While generating employment potential in local region and improving financial status of

local people, it would defiantly improve the living conditions including better education, medical

and health facility, water facility, transport, skill development etc. The development of

Infrastructures, Educational, Health facilities, skill development and other CER project works in the

local area in consultation with local Self- Government (LSG’s) will have positive impact on the

welfare of the local community.

It can be summarized that the development of proposed mining project of M/s Kavumkal Granites,

with a well designed and implemented EMP, shall have a positive impact on the development of our

state, socio-economic development of the local area and lead to overall Sustainable Development of

the region.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Final Environmental Impact Assessment Report for

GRANITE BUILDING STONE QUARRY of

M/s KAVUMKAL GRANITES

Area: 4.0262 Ha

Situated at

Sy. No:781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32),781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32)

Athikkayam Village, Naranamoozhi Panchayath, Ranny Taluk,

Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State

MAXIMUM ANNUAL PRODUCTION – 185637.8 MT

TOTAL PRODUCTION CAPACITY – 1856378 MT

LIFE OF THE MINE – 10 years

Project Proponent Mr. Kuriakose Sabu

(Managing Partner)




Prepared by


A QCI-NABET Accredited Environmental Consulting Organization 201, DDA Local Shopping Centre, E-Block,

Vikaspuri, New Delhi- 110018, INDIA. +91-11-45118929, 28542059, Mob: 8089085335

Email: [email protected] Website: www.sbaenviro.in

December 2020

Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites Final EIA Report

Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | i

Table of Contents

Preface 13

Undertaking by the Project Proponent ................................................................................ 14

Declaration by the EIA Co-ordinator .................................................................................. 15

List of Abbreviations ............................................................................................................. 17

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 19

1. 1. Preamble .............................................................................................................................. 19

1. 2. Project Proponent ............................................................................................................... 19

1. 3. Identification of the Project ............................................................................................... 19

1. 4. Terms of Reference ............................................................................................................. 20

1. 5. Brief description of the Nature, Size and Location of the Project .................................. 21

1. 6. Importance of the Project................................................................................................... 25

1. 7. Scope of the EIA Study ....................................................................................................... 25

1. 8. Applicable Environmental Regulations ............................................................................ 25

1. 9. Details of the Study Area .................................................................................................... 28

1. 10. Methodology of the EIA Study ...................................................................................... 28

1. 11. Data Collection Methodology ......................................................................................... 29

1. 12. Structure of the EIA report ............................................................................................ 32

Chapter 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 33

2.1 Description of the project ................................................................................................... 33

2.2 Location & Layout .............................................................................................................. 37

2.3 Size of the proposed lease ................................................................................................... 41

2.3.1 Proposed Mining Method ............................................................................................ 41

2.3.2 Project Cost .................................................................................................................. 44

2.4 Type of Mining – Open Cast Mining ................................................................................. 44

2.5 Description of Process ......................................................................................................... 45

2.6 Extent of Mechanization ..................................................................................................... 48

2.7 Salient features of Proposed Lease Area ........................................................................... 48

2.7.1 Topography ................................................................................................................... 48

2.7.2 Regional Geology ......................................................................................................... 49

2.7.3 Local Geology ............................................................................................................... 51

2.7.4 Geological & Mineable Reserves ................................................................................. 51

2.7.5 Use of Minerals ............................................................................................................ 54

2.7.6 Land use and Land Ownership .................................................................................... 54

2.7.7 Man power requirement ............................................................................................... 55


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | ii

2.7.8 Water requirement ....................................................................................................... 55

2.7.9 Waste management ...................................................................................................... 56

2. 8. Mine Closure ....................................................................................................................... 57

Chapter 3. DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ............................................ 60

3.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 60

3.2 Study Area for EIA ............................................................................................................. 60

3.3 Land Use - Land Cover Study ........................................................................................... 60

3.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 60

3.3.2 Objectives ...................................................................................................................... 60

3.3.3 Satellite Image Analysis ............................................................................................... 60

3.3.4 Land Use Land Cover Details ...................................................................................... 62

3.3.5 Contour Pattern of the Study Area .............................................................................. 63

3.3.6 Drainage Map of the Study Area ................................................................................. 64

3.3.7 Landslide Hazard study in the Area ............................................................................ 65

3.3.8 Soil Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 66

3.4 Geology and Hydrogeology ................................................................................................ 68

3.4.1 Geomorphology ............................................................................................................ 68

3.4.2 Geology ......................................................................................................................... 69

3.4.3 Hydrogeology ............................................................................................................... 69

3.4.4 Groundwater Resources ............................................................................................... 74

3.5 Meteorology ......................................................................................................................... 76

3.5.1 Methodology ................................................................................................................. 76

3.6 Ambient Air Quality ........................................................................................................... 80

3.6.1 Methodology Adopted for Air Quality Survey ............................................................. 80

3.6.2 Presentation of AAQ Data ........................................................................................... 84

3.7 Water Quality ...................................................................................................................... 87

3.7.1 Methodology ................................................................................................................. 87

3.7.2 Water Sampling Locations ........................................................................................... 89

3.7.3 Presentation of Results .................................................................................................... 90

3.7.4 Observations ................................................................................................................. 92

3.8 Noise Level Survey .............................................................................................................. 93

3.8.1 Identification of Sampling Locations .......................................................................... 93

3.8.2 Method of Monitoring .................................................................................................. 94

3.8.3 Methodology of Data Generation ................................................................................ 94

3.8.4 Presentation of Results ................................................................................................ 96

3.9 Ecology and Biodiversity .................................................................................................... 97


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | iii

3.9.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 97

3.9.2 Objectives of the study .................................................................................................. 97

3.9.3 Brief Description of the Project Area .......................................................................... 97

3.9.4 Biodiversity Survey Methods ........................................................................................ 98

3.9.6 Faunal Aspects ........................................................................................................... 111

3.9.7 Green Belt Development ............................................................................................ 117

3.10 Biodiversity Assessment in 10km Radius (Buffer Zone) ............................................... 118

3.10.1 Objectives of the Analysis .......................................................................................... 118

3.10.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................... 119

3.10.3 Floral Diversity Estimation ........................................................................................ 119

3.10.4 Faunal Diversity Estimation ...................................................................................... 121

3.10.5 Land Use and Land Cover Analysis .......................................................................... 123

3.10.6 Floral Diversity........................................................................................................... 124

3.10.7 Trees, Shrubs and Herbs Observed ........................................................................... 125

3.10.8 Faunal Diversity ......................................................................................................... 139

3.10.9 Anticipated Environment Impact and Mitigation Measures .................................... 144

3.10.10 Summary ................................................................................................................. 145

3.11 Demography and Socio-Economics ................................................................................. 146

3.11.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study .......................................................................... 146

3.11.2 Objectives of study ...................................................................................................... 146

3.11.3 Scope of study ............................................................................................................. 146

3.11.4 Demography ............................................................................................................... 147

3.12 Public Utilities ................................................................................................................... 149

Chapter 4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION

MEASURES 151

4.1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 151

4.2. Environmental Impact Assessment Parameters ............................................................ 151

4.3. Impact on Land Environment ......................................................................................... 151

4.4. Impacts on Water Environment ...................................................................................... 152

4.5. Impacts on Air Environment ........................................................................................... 153

4.5.1 Air Emission and Dispersion Model .......................................................................... 153

4.6. Impacts on Noise & Vibration Environment .................................................................. 159

4.7. Impacts on Biological Environment ................................................................................ 159

4.8. Impacts on Socio economic Environment ....................................................................... 160

4.9. Impact Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................ 161

4.9.1 Mitigation Measure on Soil Environment................................................................. 161


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | iv

4.9.2 Mitigation Measures on Land Environment ............................................................. 161

4.9.3 Mitigation measures on Surface water ...................................................................... 162

4.9.4 Mitigation Measures on Ground Water .................................................................... 162

4.9.5 Mitigation Measures on Air Environment ................................................................ 163

4.9.6 Mitigation measures on Noise Environment............................................................. 164

4.9.7 Mitigation Measures on Biological Environment ..................................................... 165

4.9.8 Mitigation measures on Socio-Economic environment ............................................ 165

4.10. Conclusion on the Characterisation of Impacts ......................................................... 167

Chapter 5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES .......................................................... 168

5.1. Alternative Technology..................................................................................................... 168

5.2. Alternative Site .................................................................................................................. 168

Chapter 6. ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME .............................. 169

6.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 169

6.2 Activities............................................................................................................................. 169

6.3 Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) Monitoring ........................................................................ 170

6.4 Noise Level Monitoring .................................................................................................... 170

6.5 Soil Monitoring .................................................................................................................. 171

6.6 Water Quality Monitoring ............................................................................................... 171

6.7 Ecological Environment Monitoring ............................................................................... 171

6.8 Socio- Economic Environment Monitoring .................................................................... 171

6.9 Environmental Monitoring Plan ...................................................................................... 172

Chapter 7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES .......................................................................... 175

7.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 175

7.2 Public Consultation ........................................................................................................... 175

7.3 Risk Assessment and Hazard Management .................................................................... 175

7.3.1 Objectives and Scope .................................................................................................. 175

7.3.2 Mining Activity ........................................................................................................... 175

7.3.3 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan .................................................... 177

7.3.4 Disaster Management Plan ........................................................................................ 178

7.3.5 Safety Plan .................................................................................................................. 179

7.4 Social Impact Assessment ................................................................................................. 181

7.4.1 Introduction - Corporate Environment Responsibility ............................................. 181

7.4.2 Suggested Sectors to Perform Activities under CER ................................................ 182

7.4.3 Approach adopted for assessment ............................................................................. 182

7.4.4 Proposed CER activities: ............................................................................................ 182

7.5 Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R & R) Action Plan ..................................................... 183


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | v

7.6 Slope Stability .................................................................................................................... 183

7.6.1 Geotechnical Stability ................................................................................................ 183

7.6.2 Soil Thickness and slope stability .............................................................................. 185

7.6.3 Stability Rating Parameters in Mine Area Before the Mining Operations .............. 186

7.6.4 Stability of Slope above (east) the Mine Prospect ..................................................... 187

7.6.5 Stability Rating parameters during Mining Phase ................................................... 189

7.6.6 Rockfall Potential and Other Failure Potentials at Site ........................................... 190

7.7. Traffic Movement and Transportation plan .................................................................. 191

7.7.1 Vehicular Traffic Density ............................................................................................... 192

7.7.2 Impacts on Traffic Density ............................................................................................ 195

7.7.3 Mitigation on Traffic Density .................................................................................... 196

7.8 Drainage Management ..................................................................................................... 196

7.8 Mine Waste Management ................................................................................................. 198

Chapter 8. PROJECT BENEFITS .............................................................................. 200

8.1 Improvement in Social Infrastructure ............................................................................ 200

8.2 Employment Potential ...................................................................................................... 200

8.3 Corporate Environment Responsibility .......................................................................... 201

8.4 Tax Income ........................................................................................................................ 201

Chapter 9. ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS .............................. 202

9.1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 202

Chapter 10. ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................ 203

10.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 203

10.2 Environment Management System ................................................................................. 203

10.3 Environment Policy .......................................................................................................... 203

10.4 Environment Management Measures ............................................................................. 204

10.4.1 Air Pollution Control Measures ................................................................................ 204

10.4.2 Noise Control Measure .............................................................................................. 205

10.4.3 Vibration and Fly rock Control Measures ................................................................ 205

10.4.4 Water Management & Water Pollution Control Measures ...................................... 206

10.4.5 Land Planning ............................................................................................................ 207

10.4.6 Biological Measures ................................................................................................... 207

10.4.7 Socio-economic Management .................................................................................... 208

10.5 Environmental Management Cell (EMC) ....................................................................... 208

10.6 Structure of the EMC ....................................................................................................... 208

10.7 Budget for EMP ................................................................................................................ 210

10.8 Proposed Corporate Environmental Responsibilities .................................................... 210


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | vi

Chapter 11. Summary and Conclusion ......................................................................... 214

11.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 214

11.2 Project Description ........................................................................................................... 214

11.3 Baseline Environmental Studies ...................................................................................... 216

11.4 Anticipated Environment Impacts and Management ................................................... 217

11.4.1 Air Environment......................................................................................................... 217

11.4.2 Noise Environment..................................................................................................... 218

11.4.3 Water Environment .................................................................................................... 219

11.4.4 Land Environment ..................................................................................................... 219

11.4.5 Socio-economic Environment .................................................................................... 220

11.5 Analysis of Alternatives .................................................................................................... 221

11.6 Environmental Monitoring Program .............................................................................. 221

11.7 Project Benefits ................................................................................................................. 222

11.8 Environment Management Plan ...................................................................................... 223

11.9 Schedule and Cost of the proposed project .................................................................... 223

Chapter 12. Disclosure of Consultants Engaged .......................................................... 225

12.1. Environmental Consultant ........................................................................................... 225

12.2. Credentials of SBA ENVIRO ....................................................................................... 225

12.3. Environmental Impact Assessment Team .................................................................. 226

12.4. Details of the Laboratory ............................................................................................. 228


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | vii

List of Tables

Table 1-1: Details of the Project .............................................................................................. 22

Table 1-2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring Adopted ......................... 30

Table 2-1 Features of Project ................................................................................................... 33

Table 2-2 Environmental Setting of Mine Lease area ............................................................. 37

Table 2-3 Google coordinates of Boundary Pillars.................................................................. 38

Table 2-4 Size or Magnitude of operation ............................................................................... 41

Table 2-5 Year wise production of building stone for next 10 Years ...................................... 41

Table 2-6 Project Cost ............................................................................................................. 44

Table 2-7 Details of Explosives ............................................................................................... 46

Table 2-8 Details of Hydraulic Excavators .............................................................................. 48

Table 2-9 Details of Transportation ......................................................................................... 48

Table 2-10 Stratigraphic Succession of Geographic Formation .............................................. 49

Table 2-11 Section wise Geological Reserve Estimation ........................................................ 51

Table 2-12 Section wise Mineable Reserve Estimation .......................................................... 51

Table 2-13 Reserve Estimation Section Wise .......................................................................... 52

Table 2-14 Summary of Estimated Reserves ........................................................................... 54

Table 2-15 Existing land use pattern of proposed area ............................................................ 54

Table 2-16 Employment Details .............................................................................................. 55

Table 2-17 Water Consumption ............................................................................................... 56

Table 3-1 Land use/ Land cover Statistics of Area within 10 km Radius ............................... 62

Table 3-2 Details of Soil Sampling Locations ......................................................................... 66

Table 3-3 Soil Characteristics .................................................................................................. 67

Table 3-4 Groundwater Resources of Pathanamthitta District ................................................ 74

Table 3-5 Details of Wells Inventoried in and Around Quarry ............................................... 74

Table 3-6 Meteorology Parameters Monitoring Frequency ..................................................... 77

Table 3-7 Meteorological Data during the study period .......................................................... 77

Table 3-8 Details of AAQ Monitoring Locations ..................................................................... 81

Table 3-9 Techniques used For AAQ Analyses ...................................................................... 82

Table 3-10 Parameters and Frequency of Sampling ................................................................. 83

Table 3-11 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results – Winter Season (2020) ....................... 85

Table 3-12 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results – Winter Season (2020) ....................... 86

Table 3-13 SOP for Water and Wastewater Sampling and Analysis ....................................... 88


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | viii

Table 3-14 Analytical Techniques for Water and Wastewater analysis .................................. 88

Table 3-15 Water Sampling Locations .................................................................................... 89

Table 3-16 Ground Water Quality ........................................................................................... 90

Table 3-17 Surface water Quality ............................................................................................ 92

Table 3-18 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations ................................................................. 94

Table 3-19 National Ambient Noise Level Standard ............................................................... 95

Table 3-20 Noise Levels [dB (A)] in the Study Area ............................................................... 96

Table 3-21 Plot wise details of Tree species ............................................................................ 99

Table 3-22 Biodiversity Indices estimated for the study area ................................................ 100

Table 3-23 List of Trees within the Core Zone..................................................................... 101

Table 3-24 List of Saplings within the Core Zone ................................................................. 103

Table 3-25 List of Shrubs within the Core Zone ................................................................... 105

Table 3-26 List of Herbs within the Core Zone ..................................................................... 107

Table 3-27 List of Climbers within the Core Zone ................................................................ 109

Table 3-28 List of Ferns ......................................................................................................... 111

Table 3-29 List of Birds within the study Area ..................................................................... 112

Table 3-30 List of Butterflies within the study Area ............................................................. 113

Table 3-31 List of Odonates within the study Area ............................................................... 114

Table 3-32 List of Amphibians .............................................................................................. 114

Table 3-33 List of Reptiles within the study Area ................................................................. 114

Table 3-34 List of Mammals within the study Area .............................................................. 115

Table 3-35 List of Millipedes and Centipedes ....................................................................... 116

Table 3-36 List of Ants .......................................................................................................... 116

Table 3-37 List of Spiders...................................................................................................... 116

Table 3-38 List of species recommended for greenbelt and afforestation ............................. 117

Table 3-39 List of shrubs recommends for Greenbelt ........................................................... 118

Table 3-40 Plot wise details of Tree species .......................................................................... 124

Table 3-41 Checklist of trees ................................................................................................. 125

Table 3-42 Checklist of Shrubs.............................................................................................. 126

Table 3-43 Checklist of Herbs ............................................................................................... 132

Table 3-44 Checklist of Climbers .......................................................................................... 136

Table 3-45 Checklist of mammals ......................................................................................... 139

Table 3-46 Checklist of Birds ................................................................................................ 139

Table 3-47 Checklist of Reptiles............................................................................................ 141


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | ix

Table 3-48 Checklist of Amphibians ..................................................................................... 142

Table 3-49 Checklist of butterflies ........................................................................................ 142

Table 3-50 Checklist of Odonates.......................................................................................... 143

Table 3-51 List of Insects ...................................................................................................... 144

Table 3-52 Distribution of Population within the Study Area ............................................... 147

Table 3-53 Demography of Four Villages within the 10km Study area ................................ 147

Table 3-54 Public Utilities in the Project Location ............................................................... 149

Table 4-1 Parameters of Impact ............................................................................................. 151

Table 4-2 Land use Pattern of proposed area during different period ................................... 151

Table 4-3 Final Output Data- Dispersion Modelling ............................................................. 158

Table 4-4 Conclusion on Characterisation of Impacts ........................................................... 167

Table 6-1 Environmental Monitoring During Project Planning Stage .................................. 172

Table 7-1 Summary of CER Activities Proposed .................................................................. 182

Table 7-2 Average slope in three sections ............................................................................. 184

Table 7-3 Soil thickness across the sections .......................................................................... 185

Table 7-4 Route of Transportation of Granite Building Stone .............................................. 191

Table 7-5 Standard PCU for Vehicles ................................................................................... 193

Table 7-6 Vehicular Traffic Density Survey Results of Edamuri-Koothattukulam Road ..... 193

Table 7-7 Vehicular Traffic Density Survey Results of Athikkayam Vechuchira Road ....... 194

Table 7-8 Estimation of Tippers for Transport for the proposed Quarry .............................. 195

Table 7-9 Impact in Traffic Density ...................................................................................... 195

Table 10-1 Land Use pattern of proposed area in Pre operational, Operational & Post

Operational Stages ................................................................................................................. 207

Table 10-2 Proposed Environmental Management Cell ........................................................ 209

Table 10-3: Budget for EMP.................................................................................................. 210

Table 10-4 Summary Of Cer Activities Proposed For Next 2 Years .................................... 213

Table 11-1 Salient features of the proposed expansion ......................................................... 214

Table 11-2 Summary of the Meteorological Data generated at Site ....................................... 216

Table 11-3 Likely date of start of production and likely date of completion ........................ 223

Table 12-1: NABET Accreditation Details of the Environmental Consultant ...................... 226

Table 12-2: EIA Team ........................................................................................................... 227

Table 12-3: Details of the Laboratory engaged for baseline monitoring .............................. 228


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | x

List of Figures

Figure 1.1 Cluster condition .................................................................................................... 21

Figure 1.2 Google Image showing 10 km radius from the project site.................................... 24

Figure 1.3 Connectivity Map of Proposed Lease Area ............................................................ 24

Figure 2.1 Contour Map ........................................................................................................... 34

Figure 2.2 Surface cum Geological Plan ................................................................................. 35

Figure 2.3 Surface cum Geological Section ............................................................................ 36

Figure 2.4 Google Image of Lease Area .................................................................................. 39

Figure 2.5 A view of proposed mining lease area ................................................................... 40

Figure 2.6 Year Wise development Plan ................................................................................. 42

Figure 2.7 Year Wise development Section ............................................................................ 43

Figure 2.8 Process Flow Chart ................................................................................................. 47

Figure 2.9 Geology and mineral resources of Pathanamthitta ................................................. 50

Figure 2.10 Water Usage Diagram .......................................................................................... 56

Figure 3.1 Satellite Map of Study area .................................................................................... 61

Figure 3.2 Land use/Land cover of 10 km Study Area ............................................................ 62

Figure 3.3 Digital Elevation model of 10 km study area ......................................................... 63

Figure 3.4 Contour map of 10 km radius around project site .................................................. 64

Figure 3.5 Drainage Pattern of 10 km Study Area................................................................... 65

Figure 3.6: Landslide Map ....................................................................................................... 66

Figure 3.7 Soil Sampling Locations......................................................................................... 67

Figure 3.8 Hydrogeology Map of Pathanamthitta District ...................................................... 71

Figure 3.9 Depth to water level - Pre monsoon ....................................................................... 72

Figure 3.10: Depth to water level- Post monsoon.................................................................... 73

Figure 3.11 Wells Inventoried Locations................................................................................. 76

Figure 3.12 Temperature at Proposed Quarry during Study Period ........................................ 77

Figure 3.13 Relative Humidity at Proposed Quarry during study Period ................................ 78

Figure 3.14 Wind speed at the proposed quarry during study period ...................................... 78

Figure 3.15 Windrose Diagram during Study Period .............................................................. 79

Figure 3.16: Ambient Air Quality Sampling locations ............................................................. 82

Figure 3.17 Photographs of Air Sampling Stations ................................................................. 83

Figure 3.18: Water Sampling Locations ................................................................................... 90

Figure 3.19 Water Sampling Photographs ................................................................................ 93


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | xi

Figure 3.20: Noise Monitoring Locations ................................................................................ 95

Figure 3.21 Photographs of Noise Monitoring ........................................................................ 96

Figure 3.22 Bray Curtis Cluster diagram to show the similarity of trees at different sampling

locations ................................................................................................................................. 100

Figure 3.23 Google Earth Image showing the 10KM boundary of the proposed site Study

Period ..................................................................................................................................... 119

Figure 3.24 Quadrate locations overlaid in Google Earth Image .......................................... 121

Figure 3.25 Transect locations overlaid in Google Earth Image Sampling strategy for various

classes .................................................................................................................................... 122

Figure 3.26 Land use/ land cover pattern of the 10km buffer zone of proposed granite quarry

site .......................................................................................................................................... 123

Figure 3.27 Photographs of Social Interaction ...................................................................... 149

Figure 4.1 Isopleth of PM10 ................................................................................................... 155

Figure 4.2 Isopleth of PM2.5 ................................................................................................... 156

Figure 4.3 Isopleth of SO2 ..................................................................................................... 156

Figure 4.4 Isopleth of NOx ..................................................................................................... 157

Figure 4.5 Isopleth of CO ...................................................................................................... 157

Figure 7.1 Sections Profiles of Site for Micro-slope Study ................................................... 185

Figure 7.2 The terrain view of proposed site ......................................................................... 187

Figure 7.3 Section view of site .............................................................................................. 188

Figure 7.4 Plan and Sectional view of production plan ......................................................... 189

Figure 7.5 Google image showing Transportation route within 10km radius ....................... 192

Figure 7.6 Traffic Density Study Locations .......................................................................... 193

Figure 7.7 Drainage management at the site .......................................................................... 196

Figure 7.8 Drainage Management Plan of Quarry ................................................................. 197

Figure 7.9 Location of Soil dumping area in Quarry ............................................................. 198

Figure 11.1: Process Flow Chart ............................................................................................ 216


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Pvt Ltd P a g e | xii

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Sl.No.

Annexure No.

1 Certificate of Plagiarism check 1

2 LOI from the Department of Mining and Geology 2

3 Lease Sketch 3

4 Approval Letter of Mining Plan 4

5 Cluster Certificate 5

6 Letter of Terms of Reference 6

7 Topo map of Study Area 7

8 Baseline Environmental Monitoring Report and NABL

Certificate of the Laboratory 8

9 NABET/NABL Certificate of Consultancy 9

10 Public Hearing Proceedings and Reply 10

11 Letter from Stakeholders regarding CER proposal 11


Prepared by SBA ENVIRO Systems Pvt Ltd P a g e | 13

Preface

This EIA report is prepared for the proposed Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal

Granites which is situated in Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at

Athikkayam Village, Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District,

Kerala for an area of 4.0262 hectares as per the approved Terms of Reference issued by SEIAA,

Kerala (1259(A)/EC2/2019/SEIAA dated 12/11/2020). The mine lease area attracts cluster

condition with total quarrying area more than 5 hectares (Proposed Quarry – 4.0262 Ha +

Existing Quarry of Kavumkal Granites - 6.075Ha + Manimalethu Quarry - 4.3564 + Johnson

Rocks - 9.7330 (not yet started) Total area = 24.1906 Ha) and hence requires Environmental

Impact Assessment study for obtaining Environmental Clearance as per the NGT order dated

04/09/2018, F No L-11011/175/2018-I A-II (M) dated 12th December 2018 and MoEF&CC

and the provisions of EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent amendments.

Disclaimer:

This EIA report has been prepared with all reasonable skills, knowledge, care and diligence by M/s SBA Enviro

Systems Pvt Ltd, the QCI-NABET accredited and national level leading Environmental Consultancy

Organization within the terms of the contract with the Project Proponent, M/s Kavumkal Granites,

incorporating their General Terms and Conditions of Contract and taking in to account of the resources

devoted to it by the contract. The report was discussed with the project proponent in detail before releasing.

This EIA report has been prepared using information received from M/s Kavumkal Granites, collecting

primary data and compilation of secondary data from available resources. SBA Enviro is not responsible for

the origin and authenticity of the information, drawings or design details provided by M/s Kavumkal Granites.



Undertaking by the Project Proponent

I, Mr. Kuriakose Sabu, Managing Partner and authorized signatory of M/s Kavumkal Granites,

hereby confirm that, M/s SBA ENVIRO SYSTEMS PVT LTD has prepared the EIA report for

the proposed “Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites which is situated in

Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam Village,

Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State.

I hereby undertake the ownership of the EIA report on behalf of M/s Kavumkal Granites.

I confirm that M/s Kavumkal Granites, shall be fully accountable for any misleading

information mentioned in this report.

Name: Mr. Kuriakose Sabu

Designation: Managing Partner and authorized signatory




Date: 16 December 2020



Declaration by the EIA Co-ordinator

Name of the project: Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites which is

situated in Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam

Village, Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State.

I, Mr. Yamesh Sharma, the empanelled EIA Coordinator of M/s SBA ENVIRO SYSTEMS

PVT LTD hereby certify that, the EIA for the above-mentioned project is prepared by me and

the details furnished in this report are correct and complete to the best of my knowledge.

Name: Mr. Yamesh Sharma

EIA Coordinator

Period of Involvement: January 2020– Till date

Contact Information:

Date: 16/12/2020



Declaration by the EIA Co-ordinator

Functional Area Experts Involved

S No Functional Area Name and Signature of the Expert

1.

Air pollution monitoring,

prevention and control

(AP)

Sajjathe Sulthan

2.

Water pollution

monitoring, prevention

and control (WP)

Sajjathe Sulthan

3. Land Use and Land

Cover (LU) Vikrant Kumar

4. Geology Nazar Ahammed

5. Ecology and Biodiversity

(EB) Parikshit Gautham

6. Socio economics (SE) S C Barghava

7. Solid and hazardous

(SHW) wastes Sajjathe Sulthan



List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description

AAQ : Ambient Air Quality

AP : Air Pollution

CER : Corporate Environment Responsibility

CPCB : Central Pollution Control Board

CRZ : Coastal Regulation Zone

CSR : Corporate Social Responsibility

CTE : Consent to Establish

CTO : Consent to Operate

DG : Diesel Generator

DO : Dissolved Oxygen

EIA : Environmental Impact Assessment

EMC : Environment Management Cell

EMP : Environmental Management Plan

EPA : Environment Protection Agency

FAE : Functional Area Experts

GIS : Geographic Information System

GLC : Ground Level Concentration

GPS : Global Positioning System

GW : Ground Water

Ha : Hectare

INR : Indian Rupee

ISO : International Standards Organization

kLD : kilolitres per Day

KSEB : Kerala State Electricity Board

KSPCB : Kerala State Pollution Control Board

kVA : kilo Volt Ampere

kWH : kilo Watt Hour

LSG : Local Self Government

LULC : Land Use & Land Cover

MoEF& CC : Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change

MT : Metric Tonne

NAAQ : National Ambient Air Quality

NABET : National Accreditation Board for Education and Training

NDIR : Non-Dispersive Infra-Red

NH : National Highway

NIHL

NONEL

:

:

Noise Induced Hearing Loss

Non – electrical detonators

NW : North West



OSHAS : Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series

PM

PCU

:

:

Particulate Matter

Passenger Car Unit

PPE : Personal Protection Equipments

RET : Rare Endangered and Threatened

RWH : Rain Water Harvesting

SC : Scheduled Caste

SE : Socio Economic

SEAC : State Expert Appraisal Committee

SEIAA : State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority

SEZ : Special Economic Zone

SHW : Solid and Hazardous Wastes

SOP : Standard Operating Procedure

SPCB : State Pollution Control Board

SPL : Sound Pressure Level

SSE : South-South East

ST : Scheduled Tribe

STP : Sewage Treatment Plant

SW : Surface Water

ToR : Terms of Reference

TPA : Tonnes Per Annum

WP : Water Pollution



Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION

1. 1. Preamble

The purpose of this Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is to study the environment

impact and to assess the technical feasibility, economic viability and sustainable development

of the “Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites”, which is situated in

Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam Village,

Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala for an area of 4.0262

hectares (Ha). Granite Building Stone mining is one of the important economic activities for

the setting up of the basic infrastructure facilities such as roads, housing projects, ports,

railways, irrigation projects, power infrastructure, etc. Such projects have a potential for

employment and the overall development while contributing to the state and central exchequer.

The proponent plans to develop the quarry project by adopting systematic and scientific

quarrying methods for the sustainable development of this project, giving due importance to

safety, environment and the local society.

The project proponent has engaged M/s SBA ENVIRO SYSTEMS PVT LTD (NABET

accredited EIA consultant) to assess the environmental impacts due to the mining activities, to

suggest the mitigation measures, to prepare the Environment Management Plan (EMP) as per

the approved Terms of Reference (ToR) granted by State Environmental Impact Assessment

Authority (SEIAA), Kerala. EIA has been carried out within 10 km radius of proposed mine

lease area including one season baseline monitoring from January 2020 to March 2020 (Winter

Season). The plagiarism of the report has been analysed with software Dupli Checker (online

method) on 16/12/2020 at 2.00pm, and the self-declaration of the same is enclosed as

Annexure No.1.

1. 2. Project Proponent

Name of Authorized Signatory : Mr. Kuriakose Sabu,

Designation : Managing Partner

Correspondence Address : M/s Kavumkal Granites



Contact No : +91 9447045949,+91 9495945949, +91 8089085335

E-mail ID : [email protected]

1. 3. Identification of the Project

The project proponent has identified the project site considering the mineral deposit (deposit

of granite building stone) in the area. The project is for a mine lease area of 4.0262 Ha in Sy.



Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-Sy.32) at Athikkayam Village,

Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala. The proposed lease

area is a private own land and no mining activities were carried out at this area.

The proponent has applied for the mining lease for an extent of 4.0262 ha, for project. The

Letter of Intent (LoI) for mining of granite building stone has been received from the

Directorate of Mining and Geology, Thiruvananthapuram, Kerala, vide Letter of Intent

No.5281/M3/2018 dated 23/06/2018. The copy of the Letter of Intent is enclosed as Annexure

No. 2. A Survey maps showing the said lease (lease sketch) is enclosed as Annexure No. 3.

The Mining plan has been prepared by Mr. Jayachandra Panicker P.S, Recognized Qualified

Person (RQP – DMG/KERALA/RQP/12/2017) and the same was approved by the Senior

Geologist, Pathanamthitta District, GoK, vide letter No. 1852/DOPTA/M/18 dated

24/09/2018. The Mining plan is approved for the total production of 1856378MT. The

proposed annual production` is estimated as 185637.8 MT. The copy of the approval letter of

mining plan is enclosed as Annexure No. 4.

1. 4. Terms of Reference

As per the EIA notification issued by Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change,

Government of India (MoEF &CC), dated 14th September, 2006, as amended from time to

time, this project falls under category ‘B2’ project activity as the area of the mining project is

less than 5 Ha. The EIA studies were not required for the project. However as per the NGT

order dated 13.09.2018 and the subsequent Office Memorandum of MoEF & CC, Government

of India dated 12/12/2018, if the area of the proposal as individual or as cluster condition is

>5ha it is required to take up the EIA studies including public hearing. There are three other

quarries adjacent to the proposed quarry. The first one is an existing quarry of Kavumkal

Granites for an area of 6.075Ha, second one is the Quarry of Manimalethu Crusher Industries

over an area of 4.3564 Ha and Johnson Rocks for an area of 9.733Ha (Not yet started,

application under consideration of SEIAA). Hence, considering the four quarries i.e., including

proposed quarry area of 4.0262ha, the total cluster area becomes 24.1906 Ha, the project falls

under cluster condition. The cluster certificate is enclosed with this report as Annexure 5.

Hence it falls under Cluster Condition and the proposed project is considered under Category

“B1”. Thus, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan

(EMP) is required for obtaining Environmental clearance based on Terms of Reference (ToR)

as approved by State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA).

The location of the adjacent quarries is as shown in the cluster image in Figure 1.1.

The study is conducted for the combined impact of the proposed quarry and the existing quarry.

The air/water/noise quality assessment, Traffic impacts, Drainage management, socio-

economic impact and Ecological impact were studied for the study period from January 2020

to March 2020 (Winter season).



Figure 1.1 Cluster condition

An application for obtaining ToR was submitted to SEIAA, Kerala vide File. No.

1668/EC6/2020/SEIAA on 12/05/2020. The proposal was considered in the 114th meeting of

State Experts Appraisal Committee (SEAC) held on 6th to 8th October 2020. The committee

recommended the project for grant of “ToR” for undertaking EIA study and preparation of

EMP. SEIAA, Kerala accepted the recommendations of Committee and the Standard ToR was

approved vide letter No. 1259(A)/EC2/2019/SEIAA dated 12/11/2020, copy of the same is

enclosed as Annexure No. 6.

1. 5. Brief description of the Nature, Size and Location of the Project

The proposal is for mining of minor mineral (granite building Stone) through open cast

mechanized method. The Eco-friendly Mining Plan which describes the nature, size, location

of the project is prepared by an Indian Bureau of Mine (IBM) approved RQP. Mining Plan is

prepared under the provisions of Kerala Minor Minerals Concession Rules, 2015 for quarrying

building stone with due consideration of environmental parameters. The mine lease area is for

4.0262 Ha with the proposal of maximum production capacity of 1856378 MT, in which the

maximum annual production is 185637.8 MT. The expected life of mine is about 10 years. The

average estimated cost of the project is Rs. 2,22,50,000. The project is expected to employ

about 20 persons. The details of the project such as nature, size and location are depicted in

Table 1-1.



Table 1-1: Details of the Project

Sl

No Item Details

1 Production Capacity & Life of

Quarry

Maximum annual production -185637.8 MT

Mineable reserves : 1856378 MT

Life of Mine About : 10 years

2 GPS Co-ordinate Latitude (N): 9°24'54.46"N 9°25'3.39"N

Longitude (E): 76°50'21.19"E to 76°50'28.83"E

3 Project site & Topo Sheet No Athikkayam Village, 58C/15

4 Topography of land and

elevation

The highest elevation of the lease area is 355 m MSL

and lowest is 270 m MSL. The proposed area is

hillock and the drainage of the lease area is towards

SW.

5 New / Expansion /

Modernization New- non coal mining proposal

6 Project Cost Rs. 2,22,50,000



Figure 1.2: Index Map of Proposed Lease Area

The site is easily accessible by 7.5m wide road. The State Highway-44 is passing around

4.7km NE of the proposed project site.

Route:

17.3 Km 9.4 Km 5.45 Km

PATHANAMTHITTA RANNY ATHIKKAYAM SITE

The Google image of 10 km radius shown in Figure 1.3. The connectivity map of proposed

lease area is shown in Figure 1.4.



Figure 1.2 Google Image showing 10 km radius from the project site

Figure 1.3 Connectivity Map of Proposed Lease Area

Proposed site



1. 6. Importance of the Project

The major demand of building stone is due to its high compressive strength and durability

(among the hardest, dimensional & structural stones), it can effectively withstand the vagaries

of nature. The mining project will fulfil its end uses in construction of buildings and

construction of roads etc. The mining and associated activities bring about gains in Gross

Domestic Product (GDP). The project will create direct and indirect employment opportunities.

The project proponent needs to pay royalty to the DMG, GoK for every unit of the mineral

produced from the mine. Direct and indirect taxes will also be paid by the project proponent to

the Local Self Government, State Government and to the Central Government. These are the

sources of revenue for the Government. The public revenue will be utilized by Government for

development of various infrastructural facilities for the public in the field of health, education

and social welfare, etc.

1. 7. Scope of the EIA Study

The scope and objective of the study is to foresee the potential environmental problems that

may arise out of the mining activities and suggest the methods to mitigate the impact on the

Environment. The EIA study includes detail characterization of various environmental

components like Air, Noise, Water, Soil, Land and socio-economics within an area of 10 km

radius around the Mining Lease area. The EIA is done based on collection of one season data

January 2020 to March 2020 (Winter season).

• Comply with the entire ToR by SEAC.

• Environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline environmental status of the

study area.

• Collection of available secondary data from concerned department.

• Identification of Environmental Aspects and its associated impacts on the environment.

• Prediction of impacts on environmental attributes.

• Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area

by using scientifically developed and widely accepted EIA Methodologies.

• Preparation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for

improving the environmental quality.

• Identification of critical environmental attributes, which require monitoring.

• To check the compliance of operations as per the statutory Consent/Legal requirements

1. 8. Applicable Environmental Regulations

With respect to prevention and control of environmental pollution, the following Acts and

Rules of MoEF&CC, GoI govern the proposed project:

➢ The Environment Protection Act, 1986

An Act to provide for the protection and improvement of environment and for matters

connected there with. Introduction of this statute was due to a decision taken at United

Nation Conference on the Human Environment held at Stockholm in June, 1972. This

is an umbrella Act and project proponent is required to comply with the provisions of

the Act. A few of these are summarized below: -



➢ The EIA Notification, 2006 & the subsequent amendments

EIA Notification, 2006 was issued under Section 3 of the Environment Protection Act,

in supersession of EIA Notification, 1994. Through this Notification, the Central

Governments directs that before the commencement of any activity or modernization

of existing activity listed in the "Schedule" to the Notification, prior EC is mandatory.

Prior EC is required for expansion, modernization, change in lease area, product mix

etc.

➢ The Water Pollution (Prevention & Control) Act, 1974

An Act to provide the prevention and control of water pollution and the maintaining or

restoring of wholesomeness of water, for the establishment, with a view to carrying out

the purposes of aforesaid, of Boards for the prevention and control of water pollution,

for conferring on and assigning to such Boards powers and functions relating thereto

and for matters connected therewith. Any activity before its establishment needs to take

Consent to Establish (CTE) and Consent to Operate (CTO) from the concerned

Pollution Control Board.

➢ The Air Pollution (Prevention & Control) Act, 1981

An Act to provide for the prevention, control and abatement of air pollution for the

establishment, with a view to carrying out the aforesaid purposes, of Boards, for confer

ring on and assigning to such Boards powers and functions relating thereto and for

matters connected there with. Any activity before its establishment needs to take

Consent to Establish and Consent to operate from the concerned Pollution Control

Board.

➢ The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000.

This Rule is issued under Sect ion 3 of Environment Protect ion Act. Through this Rule,

four categories areas / zone as per the Schedule is provided in respect of "Ambient Air

Quality Standards in respect of Noise" if sensitive receptors in the project area are

affected by the noise created by the project, necessary mitigation measures are to be

proposed in EIA report.

➢ The Mines Act, 1952

An Act to amend and consolidate the law relating to the Regulation of labour and safety

in mines.

➢ The Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957

An Act to provide for the development and regulation of mines and minerals under the

control of the Union. This Act empowers the State Governments to make rules in

respect of minor minerals. These rules are to be followed and got inspected by IBM/

DGMS.

➢ The Minor Minerals Conservation and Development Amendment Rules 2018

These rules aim to ensure that mineral production is not affected by the expiry of

existing mining leases. The rules require general exploration (G2) to be carried out by



1 April 2019 for all mining leases (other than coal, lignite and atomic minerals) used

for non-captive purposes expiring in March 2020. The amendment also lays down

timelines for the implementation of exploration plans to ensure seamless transition on

the expiry of existing mining leases.

➢ The Kerala Minor Mineral Concession Rules, 2015

This Rule is issued under Mine and Mineral (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957.

Through this Rule, the concept of Eco-friendly mining plan was introduced for all

categories of Minor Mineral mining activities.

➢ The Explosive Act, 1884

An Act to regulate the manufacture, possession, use, sale, transport, import export of

explosive.

➢ The Explosive Rules, 2008

For the purposes of these rules, the explosives shall be classified in the manner specified

in Schedule I. Approvals are required to be taken by the person who is involved in the

handling and usage of explosives.

➢ The Kerala Promotion of Tree Growth in Non-Forest Areas (Amendment) Act,

2007.

An Act expedient to amend the Kerala Promotion of Tree Growth in Non- Forest Areas

Act, 2005. As per the said Act, no permission is necessary for cutting and removal of

trees provided in the Schedule.

➢ The Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016.

Rules have been made for management of Hazardous Waste and other waste, occupier

shall be responsible for safe and environmentally sound management of hazardous and

other wastes. The hazardous and other wastes generated in the establishment of an

occupier shall be sent or sold to an authorised actual user or shall be disposed of in an

authorised disposal facility.

➢ Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules 2010

The Batteries (Management & Handling) Rules, 2001 apply to every manufacturer,

importer, re-conditioner, assembler, dealer, recycler, auctioneer, consumer and bulk

consumer involved in manufacture, processing, sale, purchase and use of batteries or

components thereof.

➢ Solid Waste Management Rule 2016

For the purpose of segregation, store and handover to authorised collectors of waste at

source itself. Shall not throw burn or bury the solid waste generated on streets, public

spaces or in drains or waste bodies.

.



1. 9. Details of the Study Area

The study area for the present EIA study is the area covered within the 10 km radius from the

boundary of the facility. The topographical map of the study area is attached as Annexure No.

7.

1. 10. Methodology of the EIA Study

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study has been conducted within an area of 10 km

radius around the quarry lease area. The EIA/EMP has been prepared based on EIA

Notification 2006, as amended from time to time and the approved ToR.

The various steps involved in the study include:

• Identification of significant environmental parameters and assessing the status within

the impact zone.

• Prediction of Impacts envisaged due to proposed scheme on various environmental

parameters.

• Evaluation of impacts after superimposing the predicted scenario developed by using

AERMOD model over the baseline scenario.

• Collection of site-specific meteorological data at the mine site.

• Carrying out a site-specific ecological study.

• Carrying out a site-specific study for the Core and Buffer Zone for Ambient air, Water,

Soil, Land use, socio economic status etc.

• Literature review that includes identification of relevant data from various government

agencies and other sources for socio-economy, demography, meteorology, land use,

ecology, etc.

• Identify various existing pollution loads due to mining and domestic activities in the

buffer zone.

• Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area

by using scientifically developed and widely accepted EIA Methodologies.

• Preparation of EMP outlining the measures for improving the environmental quality.

Reconnaissance survey was conducted by the SBA Enviro team along with the concerned

officials of proposed lease area and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

• Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded from the site

• Existing topography, drainage pattern and location of surface water bodies like ponds,

canals, and rivers;

• Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;

• Areas which represent baseline conditions; and

• Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes.

• The field observations are used to:

o To observe the baseline environmental status of study area;



o Identify extent of negative impacts on community/natural resources

1. 11. Data Collection Methodology

Identify mitigation measures and monitoring requirements. The baseline information on micro-

meteorology, ambient air quality, water quality, noise levels, soil quality and floristic

descriptions are largely drawn from the data generated by NABL Accredited consultancy. The

Functional Area Experts (FAE) were involved in selection of monitoring locations and data

collection. Long term meteorological data recorded from the site. Apart from these, secondary

data have been collected from Census Handbook, Revenue Records, Statistical Department,

Soil Survey and Land use Organization, District Industries Centre, Forest Department, Central

Ground Water Authority, etc.

The study also provides framework and institutional strengthening for implementing the

mitigation measures. Field studies have been conducted to determine existing conditions of

various environmental attributes as outlined in Table 1-2.



Table 1-2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring Adopted

Sr.

No.

Environmental

Component

Sampling

Locations

Sampling

Parameters

Sampling

Period

Sampling

Frequency

Methodology

1

Meteorology Quarry

Site

Temperature, Wind

Speed, Wind

Direction

3 months Hourly

The parameters during the study period ( January 2020

– March 2020) were obtained from the site. Rainfall, Average

rainy days 3 months Daily

Relative Humidity 3 months Hourly

2

Ambient Air

Quality 4 locations

As per NAAQS

2009- PM10, PM2.5,

SO2, NOX, and CO

Two days

per week for

12 weeks

24 hourly

Gravimetric method for PM2.5 and PM10. Modified

West & Geake method for SO2 (IS-5182 part-II 1969)

using Tetrachloromercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution.

Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for

NOX using Sodium Arsenate absorbing solution of

0.01 N absorbing solutions. CO was measured by Non-

Dispersive Infra-Red (NDIR) Spectroscopy as per IS-

5182 (Part-XXI)

3

Water Quality

3 locations

(1-Surface

water

2-Ground

water)

As per IS:10500-

2012

Grab

sampling

Once in

study period

As per APHA methods. The conductivity, temperature

was analyzed at site laboratory and rest of the

parameters were analyzed at the laboratory of M/s

Envirodesigns Eco Labs (NABL accredited

laboratory).

4

Noise 4 locations Leq, Lday, Lnight, LD/N

Hourly

readings for

24 hours

Once during

study period Integrated on hourly basis



Sr.

No.

Environmental

Component

Sampling

Locations

Sampling

Parameters

Sampling

Period

Sampling

Frequency

Methodology

5

Terrestrial

Ecology

Total

study area Flora and fauna

Field

observations

Once during

study period

Through field visits and secondary source

1. Flora, fauna (terrestrial & aquatic) including zoo

plankton, phytoplankton and benthos.

2. Survival rate of saplings

6 Demography and

Socio-economic

aspects

Total

study area Demographic profile - -

Through field visits and secondary information sources

such as the Census data etc.

Per capita income, Health index

7

Soil

Characteristics Lease area - Grab

sampling

Once during

study period

Parameters related to agricultural and plantation

potential

o

8

Land Use Total

study area

Trend of land use

change for different

categories - - Field visit, GIS application

9 Geology

Total

study area Geological studies - - Resource map and approved mining plan

10

Hydrology Total

study area

Drainage area and

pattern, nature of

streams,

hydrogeology etc.

- -

As per resource map, available central ground water

board report for Pathanamthitta District. Field studies of

core and buffer zone



1. 12. Structure of the EIA report

This EIA report contains baseline data, project description and assessment of impacts and

preparation of EMP. This report is prepared, based on the approved ToR by SEIAA for the

Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites.

The report is organized in following twelve chapters:

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 2: Project Description

Chapter 3: Description of the Environment

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impact and Mitigation Measures

Chapter 5: Analysis of Alternatives

Chapter 6: Environmental Monitoring Program

Chapter 7: Additional Studies

Chapter 8: Project Benefits

Chapter 9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

Chapter 10: Environmental Management Plan

Chapter 11: Summary and Conclusion

Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants



Chapter 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Description of the project

The proposed minor mineral (building Stone) quarry project will have total production capacity

of 1856378 MT with maximum annual production of 185637.8 TPA. The rubble from the mine

will be sent to the stone crusher unit located at about 200m from the mine lease area to produce

various sizes of coarse and fine aggregates and M-sand which are used for building construction.

The mining operation will be carried out by opencast mechanized method as per the approved

Mining Plan. Proposed maximum Production as per approved Mining Plan is 185637.8

Tonnes/annum.

Table 2-1 Features of Project

Sl no Particulars Details

1 Method of Quarrying Semi mechanized method of open cast quarrying

2 Nearest habitation Nearest habitation-208m-N

3 Accessibility 7.5m quarry approach road connecting with the

Edamuri-Koothattukulam Road.

4 Geological mineral reserves 3764168 MT

5 Mineable reserve 1856378 MT

6 Blocked mineral reserves 1907790 MT

7 Life of mine 10 years

8 Targeted annual production Maximum – 185637.8 Tonnes/annum

9 Highest and lowest elevation 355 m AMSL -270 m AMSL

10 Slope

Section AA’- 24o

Section BB’- 26o

Section CC’– 27o

11 Hazard zone status Safe (land slide) – In medium hazard Zone



Figure 2.1 Contour Map



Figure 2.2 Surface cum Geological Plan



Figure 2.3 Surface cum Geological Section



2.2 Location & Layout

The proposed mining area has a total lease area of 4.0262 Ha. The proposed greenbelt area is

0.6034 Ha. The Environmental Setting of proposed lease area is given in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Environmental Setting of Mine Lease area

S.

No. Particulars Details

1 Geographical Location Latitude (N): 9°24'54.46"N to 9°25'3.39"N

Longitude (E): 76°50'21.19"E to 76°50'28.83"E

2 Elevation of lease area 355-270 m MSL

3 Nearest habitation Nearest habitation-208m N



5 Nearest town Koothattukulam -1.4km-NE

6 Nearest Airport Cochin International Airport -94.7km-NW

7 Nearest Highway / Roads SH 44 - 4.7km - NE

NH 183A- 5.6km - S

8 Nearest Railway Station Chengannur railway station -27.5 km -SW

9 Power supply KSEB Overseer Office, Athikkayam -3.1 km-S

10 Water Source Open Well

11 Nearest Hospital / dispensary Government Hospital, Vechoochira-1.5km-NE

12 Education facility Government LP School, Edamuri-1.1km-SW

13 Police Station Vechoochira Police Station-1.37 km-NE

14 Fire Station Fire and Rescue Station, Kanjirappally-16.4 km-

N

15 Ambulance Government Hospital, Vechoochira-1.5km-NE

16 Church / temple / mosque

St. Joseph’s Catholic Church, Vechoochira -

2.13km-NE

Nusarathul Islam Juma Masjid vechoochira -

2.74km -NE

Edamury mahakshethra samuchayam – 1.1 km -

SW

17

Ecological sensitive zone

(National Park, Sanctuary,

Habitat for Migratory Birds,

Tiger Reserve)

Periyar National Park-10.5km-NE

18 Interstate Boundary None within the study area



S.

No. Particulars Details

19 Critically Polluted Area as

identified by CPCB None within the study area

20 Defence installations None within the study area

21 Archaeological Features None within the study area

22 Nearest Forests Konni Reserve Forest -20.0km-SE


23 Nearest streams/ rivers/ water

bodies (from mine boundary) Pampa River-3.20km-S

24

High Level Working Group

(Kasthorirangan Report

regarding Western ghat)

Report status

Not Fall in ESA

25 CRZ Not Applicable

The Google Image of the project site is given in Figure 2.4 and the corresponding coordinates

of the boundary pillars are provided in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Google coordinates of Boundary Pillars

Pillar No Latitude Longitude

BP1 9°24'59.91"N 76°50'21.57"E

BP2 9°25'3.28"N 76°50'21.19"E

BP3 9°25'3.30"N 76°50'24.04"E

BP4 9°25'3.31"N 76°50'26.40"E

BP5 9°25'3.39"N 76°50'26.75"E

BP6 9°25'1.98"N 76°50'26.81"E

BP7 9°25'2.24"N 76°50'27.44"E

BP8 9°25'0.00"N 76°50'27.87"E

BP9 9°24'57.81"N 76°50'28.83"E

BP10 9°24'56.41"N 76°50'27.12"E

BP11 9°24'54.75"N 76°50'25.27"E

BP12 9°24'54.46"N 76°50'24.97"E



Figure 2.4 Google Image of Lease Area



Figure 2.5 A view of proposed mining lease area



2.3 Size of the proposed lease

The size and magnitude of the lease area is as given Table 2-4.

Table 2-4 Size or Magnitude of operation

Sr. No. Particulars Details

1 Lease Area 4.0262 Ha

2 Mineable Reserve 1856378 MT

3 Maximum Annual

Production 185637.8 MTA

4 Mine Waste 90,585MT (Top soil) and 92,819MT (Overburden)

5 Life of Mine About 10 years

6 Total Man Power (Nos.) About 20 Persons

2.3.1 Proposed Mining Method

Open cast semi-mechanized mining will be adopted to extract building stone of required size.

Machineries like tractor mounted compressor attached with jack hammers is proposed for

drilling and blasting. Excavators are proposed for lifting and loading of rock. Tippers are

proposed for the transportation to the destination.

Mode of working is semi mechanized quarrying operation using shot hole drilling with the help

of compressor and jack hammers and NONEL blasting. Waste and raw materials is removed

using Hydraulic excavator and loaded directly to the tippers. The bench height and width are

designed as 5m. The targeted maximum production of Stone is about 185637.8 MTA.

Table 2-5 Year wise production of building stone for next 10 Years

Sl. No. Year ROM (in MT)

1 I Year 185637.8

2 II Year 185637.8

3 III Year 185637.8

4 IV Year 185637.8

5 V Year 185637.8

6 VI Year 185637.8

7 VII Year 185637.8

8 VIII Year 185637.8

9 IX Year 185637.8

10 X Year 185637.8



Figure 2.6 Year Wise development Plan



Figure 2.7 Year Wise development Section



2.3.2 Project Cost

The estimated total cost of the project is Rs. 2,22,50,000/-, and break up of project cost is given

below Table 2-6.

Table 2-6 Project Cost

S.No Particular Amount

1

Excavator, Rock Breaker 70,00,000

Water Tanker 3,00,000

Tippers, Jack hammers, Air compressor 30,00,000

2 Strengthening of Roads 4,00,000

3 Cost for Infrastructure like site office,

Temporary shed, Rest shelter, etc 5,00,000

4 Cost of Environmental Protection 4,00,000

5 Cost for construction of Garland drains, SST,

RWHP, Gully checks, etc 2,00,000

6 Land cost (359.5 Ares x 27955.49RS /Are )

+Misc. 1,00,50,000

7 Pre-operational expense 2,00,000

8 Miscellaneous 2,00,000

Total 2,22,50,000/-

2.4 Type of Mining – Open Cast Mining

Salient Features of Mode of working

The mining will be done by open cast semi mechanized. The working will be done by forming

benches of 5m height. The Stone production will be started from the first year the systematic

working of open cast mines, the main development work will be the forming of systematic

benching. The height of bench will not be kept more than 5m at a time and the width of the

benches will be always kept safe according to provisions. The Mining will be done with the

help of tools such as drills, jack-hammer, compressors, hand shovel, picks, excavators etc.

Loading of Stone will be done with the help of shovel and excavators at face and at stock yard.

The truck / tipper will be used for transportation of Stone from mine site to destination.

The cost of the Stone is directly dependent on the size of the material mined. First Stone bench

will be opened by removal of Soil. Stone will be mined out either by labour or with the help of

JCB / Hitachi.



The Geological and Mineable Reserves are estimated by cross-sectional Methods up to a depth

of 345-265m from the hill top. Highest and lowest elevation is 355m & 270m respectively

above mean sea level. Geological cross sections are drawn across the exposed rock. The

volume between the cross section is arrived on the basis of the average area of the parallel cross

section method using CAD software and multiplying bi-sectional interval. Tonnage is arrived

by multiplying with bulk density (B.D), which is 2.5MT/cum for building stone.

Mining Methods:

Open cast semi-mechanized mining will be adopted to extract Building stone of required size.

Machineries like tractor mounted compressor attached with jack hammers is proposed for

drilling and blasting. Excavators are proposed for lifting and loading of rock. Tippers are

proposed for the transportation to the destination.

Mode of working:

Mode of working is semi mechanized quarrying operation using shot hole drilling with the help

of compressor and jack hammers and smooth blasting. Waste and raw materials is removed

using Hydraulic excavator and loaded directly to the tippers. The bench height and width are

designed as 5m.

Details of Top Soil / Mineral Production proposed for the five years

The development involves only removal of 1m top soil to be generated out of production. Here,

the recovery is taken as 100% of total excavation since the area is covered with a thin layer of

weathered gneiss. The rubble from the mine will be sent to the stone crusher unit located at

about 0.20 km from the mine lease area to produce various sizes of coarse and fine aggregates

and M-sand which are used for building construction.

Disposal of Top Soil/ Waste

A total quantity of 90585 tonne of topsoil is proposed to be removed during mining operations.

The topsoil excavated from the quarry will be dumped separately at pre-determined place and

subsequently utilized for spreading over reclaimed areas for plantation. About 92819 tonnes of

overburden (OB) will be generated throughout the mine life. This waste will be utilized within

the pit for lying of haul roads. At the end use, OB can be reutilized as soil base for plantation.

2.5 Description of Process

The proposed mining operations will be carried out by open cast semi-mechanized method.

Method of Quarrying

Geological parameters of the ore body and the geotechnical field, observations made opted to

work by mechanical mode and the method is of by opencast with a bench system is adopted to

work the deposit. The top of the bench having thin cap of soil cover and weathered genesis on

slope. Topsoil cover will be removed ahead of rock is by using excavators/JCB. The excavated

topsoil is stacked separately and same will be used for avenue plantation purpose. The

quarrying is being done by mechanization mode of operation by using excavators; jack



hammers drills and tippers etc. It is proposed jack hammers drill is using for drilling purpose

hence initially it is proposed sub level bench method keeping a sub bench height of 2.50m and

the final stage all the sub benches will merged. The maximum bench height is kept 5.0 meters

width at ultimate stage by maintaining 45 degree (since granite is hard rock).

Drilling & Blasting

Since the bench height needs to be maintained 5.0 m, blast hole will be by jack hammer where

the diameter is normally 32 mm and the depth of the hole is 2.5 to 2.6 m. Blasting pattern is

generally square or staggered with burden ranging from 0.75 to 1.00 meters and spacing of 1.0

to1.2 meters. Usually single / double row of holes is blasted along free face to achieve optimum

power factor, best fragmentation and minimized adverse impacts on account of blasting.

Maximum holes blasted per day are 30 to 40 with normal delay detonators to mitigate adverse

impacts such as air blast, throw and the ground vibration.

Holes are electrically detonated using electric detonators. Nitrate Mixture types of explosives

are used for blasting with 20 to 25 percent, proportion of primer/booster cartridges and rest as

column charge. About 2 to 3 kgs of explosives are loaded in 32 mm diameter holes and power

factor ranging between 7 to 8 tons per kgs of explosives is achieved. Lessee is having the

Explosive license.

➢ Type of explosive to be used

Only class 2 and class 6 explosive are proposed for use as given below:

Table 2-7 Details of Explosives

Booster (20%) Slurry explosive

Explosive

(Column charge) (80%)

Nitrate Fuel oil (NFO).

The NFO mixture can be readily produced at a site by

mixing nitrate (94.5 %) with diesel oil (5.5 %).

Initiator Non-Electric detonators

➢ Storage of Explosive

Considering low consumption, a 250 kg magazine is exists for storing the explosive. The

controlled blasting is proposed by adopting all the safety measures as per “MMR 1961” and

with the permission of DGMS.

Blasting will be performed as per requirement on the face. The explosive by authorized blasting

party himself and the blasting will be carried out by registered blasting contractor as per present

practices.

➢ Loading and Hauling:

Loading of the building stone blocks will be done mechanically to tippers of 10 tons capacity

and transported from the quarry to the stockyard and mineral rejection/waste will also be



handled mechanically. In the quarry the road will be maintained with 1 in 16 gradients.

Sufficient number of bunds and parapet walls will be made all along the quarry haulage roads

wherever necessary in order to maintain safe working conditions by using the waste generated

during the course of quarry operations.

Raw material required along with estimated quantity, likely source, marketing area of final

product/s, mode of transport of raw material and finished product

No raw material will be required for mining of Masonry / building stone. The final product will

be sent to consumer based on their demand. The mode of transportation of raw material and

finished product will be by road only. Tippers/ trucks will be used for transportation to the end

users.

The following points have been considered while calculating the reserves of stone.

1. The reserves of minerals have been estimated by using the method of preparation of

sections and applying the influence of such sections to limited distance and multiplying

it by width.

2. Based on the actual geological mapping and cross section preparation, the proved

reserve has been taken.

The specific gravity of minerals has been taken as 2.5 i.e., 1 m3 of mineral in situ = 2.5 tonne.

The overall process involved in mining is described as a flow chart as shown below

Figure 2.8 Process Flow Chart

This section outlines current mining method, estimated production on yearly basis, methods

of current production and proposed changes if any and list of mining equipment.

Removal of Top soil

Excavation by Drilling and Blasting

Rock Breaking & Transportaion

Stacking

Dispatch



2.6 Extent of Mechanization

The machineries are proposed to be purchased or hired for use in mines for systematic operation

and development.

a) Drilling:

Drilling of shot-holes will be carried out using compressor and Jack Hammer combination.

Depth of holes shall be 1-2m and the spacing shall be 0.75m and burden shall be 0.50m. To

estimate a correct blasting geometry and to affect a perfect pre-determined fragmentation and

fly rock control, certain amount of trial blast is a prerequisite.

b) Loading Equipment:

Loading shall be done by Excavator into tippers from the working place. Topsoil and Building

stones shall be dumped in the site. The applicant is proposed to engage three Hydraulic

excavators and one hydraulic rock breakers and tippers of 15-20 Tonnes capacity for

transportation of rock and internal transport of topsoil.

Table 2-8 Details of Hydraulic Excavators

Sl. No Equipment/ Machinery No. of units Size/ Capacity

1. Excavator with Breaker 3 185 HP, 132(kw)

2. Jack Hammer 2 75 HP

3. Box Compressor 2 45 HP

c) Transportation:

Transport of rocks and soil shall be done by Tippers of 15 – 20 tonnes capacity.

Table 2-9 Details of Transportation

Type Nos. Size/ Capacity Make Motive H.P

Tipper 15 15-20 M.T Ashok Leyland /

Bharath Benz Diesel 110

Water

Tanker 1 10 KL Ashok Leyland Diesel 130

2.7 Salient features of Proposed Lease Area

2.7.1 Topography

Topography of the lease area is hilly terrain with some of the proposed land is covered with

native trees, shrubs, herbs bushes etc. Highest elevation of the lease area is 355 M above MSL



and lowest is 270 M above MSL. The drainage of the area is controlled by seasonal channels

towards south side which joins to seasonal streams.

2.7.2 Regional Geology

Geologically, Pathanamthitta district forms part of the Precambrian metamorphic shield

comprising (i) Charnockite Group, Khondalite Group and Megmatite Complex of Archaean

age, (ii) Acid intrusive of Proterozoic age and (iii) rocks of Cenozoic age (basic intrusive,

Neogene and Quaternary). Charnockite group is the dominant formation of the area within

which occur concordant, linear and lensoidal bodies of calc granulite and quartzite of

Khondalite Group. The Charnockite Group comprises Charnockite (hypersthenes granite),

pyroxene-granulite and cordierite gneiss. Charnockite is the dominant rock and its variants are

charnockite gneiss, massive charnockite and hypersthenes-diopside gneiss. The rock is

generally dark grey and crudely foliated. Cordierite gneiss occurs as impersistent bands within

charnockite, while pyroxene granulite is seen as restites, mostly in the west. At places,

charnockite is migmatised resulting in the formation of biotite gneiss, and garnet-biotite gneiss

(Migmatite Complex). These rocks are predominant towards south. The area witnessed a period

of igneous activity during the Proterozoic as evidenced from the granite and syeno-granite (acid

intrusive) bodies. Pegmaite and quartz veins traverse the older rocks parallel to the regional

foliation. Basic igneous activity, probably of Late Mesozoic age, is evidenced from the dolerite

and gabbro dykes cutting across the older rocks. These dykes have a general NW-SE trend.

Warkalli sediment of Neogene age is exposed near Thiruvalla. Along the western margin, the

basement and sedimentary rocks have been lateritised. The generalized stratigraphic succession

of the geologic formations met within this district is as follows:

Table 2-10 Stratigraphic Succession of Geographic Formation

Rock formation Age

Top soil –Red, Laterite soil Recent Age

Charnockite

(Granite building stone)

Archaean formation

Peninsular gneiss & Migmatite Complex Archaean formation



Figure 2.9 Geology and mineral resources of Pathanamthitta

Project Site



2.7.3 Local Geology

The area is mainly composed of crystalline metamorphic complex. The area of mining lease

contains light pink colour Building Stone. Charnockite which mainly composed Hypersthene,

Quartz, and Feldspar, with some ferromagnesian minerals. The grain size is medium to course.

Almost the formations in the lease area are having the strike parallel to the Western Ghats

which is trending deeply and there are no other structural features like fault, folding and joints.

2.7.4 Geological & Mineable Reserves

In this area the building stone exposures are bordering to the lease boundary. The mineable

reserves are arrived after deducting the reserves locked in mines safety slope along with

boundary in compliance with mineral concession rules. The quantity of such kind of reserves

is arrived as following: -

Method of Estimation of Reserves

Considering the above parameters and exposures observed in the existing pit in the allotted

area, the surface geological plan and geological cross-sections are prepared on a scale 1:1000,

the reserves for Stone and associated minor minerals have been estimated on cross- sectional

area method.

Table 2-11 Section wise Geological Reserve Estimation

GEOLOGICAL RESERVES

Section

Section

Area

(Sq.m)

Influence (m) Volume

(cu.m)

Bulk

Density

Quantity

(Tonnes)

A-A' 7002 82 574164 2.5 1435410

B-B' 7361 53 390133 2.5 975333

C-C' 6295 86 541370 2.5 1353425

Total 3764168 MT

Mineable Reserves: -

To estimate the mineable reserves, the reserves blocked under 7.5 statutory barriers and due

to formation of systematic benches up to Ultimate Pit Limit have been considered.

Table 2-12 Section wise Mineable Reserve Estimation



MINEABLE RESERVES

Section Section

Area

(Sq.m)

Influence

(m)

Volume

(cu.m)

Bulk

Density

Quantity

(Tonnes)

A-A' 3971 71 281941 2.5 704853

B-B' 3940 53 208820 2.5 522050

C-C' 3270 77 251790 2.5 629475

Total 1856378 MT

Total Geological Reserve =3764168MT

Total Mineable Reserve = 1856378MT

Table 2-13 Reserve Estimation Section Wise

MINEABLE RESERVES

SECTION A-A'

REDUCE

LEVEL OF

BENCH

AREA

(Sq.m)

INFLUENCE

(m) DENSITY

QUANTITY

(TON)

340 16 71 2.5 2840

335 44 71 2.5 7810

330 68 71 2.5 12070

325 95 71 2.5 16862.5

320 129 71 2.5 22897.5

315 169 71 2.5 29997.5

310 207 71 2.5 36742.5

305 241 71 2.5 42777.5

300 277 71 2.5 49167.5

295 316 71 2.5 56090

290 348 71 2.5 61770

285 373 71 2.5 66207.5

280 401 71 2.5 71177.5

275 427 71 2.5 75792.5

270 450 71 2.5 79875

265 410 71 2.5 72775

TOTAL 704853 MT SECTION B-B'

DENSITY



REDUCE

LEVEL OF

BENCH

AREA

(Sq.m)

INFLUENCE

(m)

QUANTITY

(TON)

345 20 53 2.5 2650

340 37 53 2.5 4902.5

335 74 53 2.5 9805

330 99 53 2.5 13117.5

325 128 53 2.5 16960

320 152 53 2.5 20140

315 181 53 2.5 23982.5

310 209 53 2.5 27692.5

305 239 53 2.5 31667.5

300 268 53 2.5 35510

295 288 53 2.5 38160

290 317 53 2.5 42002.5

285 348 53 2.5 46110

280 375 53 2.5 49687.5

275 400 53 2.5 53000

270 421 53 2.5 55782.5

265 384 53 2.5 50880

TOTAL 522050MT

SECTION C-C'

REDUCE

LEVEL OF

BENCH

AREA

(Sq.m)

INFLUENCE

(m) DENSITY

QUANTITY

(TON)

340 14 77 2.5 2695

335 36 77 2.5 6930

330 70 77 2.5 13475

325 93 77 2.5 17903

320 117 77 2.5 22523

315 146 77 2.5 28105

310 172 77 2.5 33110

305 199 77 2.5 38308

300 227 77 2.5 43698

295 254 77 2.5 48895

290 274 77 2.5 52745

285 297 77 2.5 57173

280 317 77 2.5 61023

275 350 77 2.5 67375

270 370 77 2.5 71225

265 334 77 2.5 64295

TOTAL 629475MT



In this area the building stone exposures are bordering to the lease boundary. The mineable

reserves are arrived after deducting the reserves locked in mines barrier along the boundary in

compliance with Metalliferous Mines Regulations Act. Summary of Geological and mineable

reserve is given below.

Table 2-14 Summary of Estimated Reserves

RESERVES IN MT

Category R O M (MT)

Mineable reserves 1856378 MT

Blocked reserves 1907790 MT

Geological reserves 3764168 MT

Note: Geological Reserves =Mineable Reserves + Blocked Reserves

Of the above Geological reserves of 3764168MT, only 1856378MTof reserves can be exploited

/ mined, while the balance of 1907790MT of reserves is getting blocked which cannot be

mined, due to the boundary and practical constraints. Hence for all practical purpose (for

production and future planning) only Mineable reserves are considered.

2.7.5 Use of Minerals

The rock produced from the quarry is sent to the Crusher unit near by the location for the final

product generation. The aggregate produced is sold to the contractors and to the consumers

which is finally consumed locally for road (State Highway & National Highway) & building

construction works

2.7.6 Land use and Land Ownership

The land in the lease area is private own land. The proposed land is mostly covered with native

trees, shrubs, herbs, grass, climbers, bushes etc. Land, in core zone i.e., 500 m around the lease

area is generally hillock and is used for mining. The other areas are covered with native plants.

In addition to above, there are several houses within 500 m. radius from the proposed quarry

and the nearest house is located at outside the 208 m. of the mine boundary

The lease Area does not involve any forest, agriculture or grazing land. The land is private own

land, the land is not viable for agricultural purpose.

Table 2-15 Existing land use pattern of proposed area

No. Land Use Pre-Operational (Ha)

1 Old Mined out area -

2 Road -

3 Green belt area -



No. Land Use Pre-Operational (Ha)

4 Virgin Area 4.0262

Total 4.0262

2.7.7 Man power requirement

As per Mines safety under the provisions of MMR, 1961 under the Mines Act, 1952, whenever

the number of workers employed is more than 10, it is preferred to have a qualified Mines Mate

to keep all the production workers directly under his control and supervision. A mines clerk

shall also be appointed to keep the registers and record of the mine and make necessary entries

for the persons employed in the mines. The following man power is proposed for quarrying

Building Stone during the five-year period to achieve the proposed production and to comply

with the provisions of the Government norms.

Table 2-16 Employment Details

Sy. No. Name of the post Nos.

1 Mechanical Engineer 2

2 Quarry Supervisor 2

3 Mine Mate 2

4 Blasting Helpers 4

5 Blast man 2

6 Mine Labours 8

Total 20

It will be ensured that child labourers will not be engaged for quarrying operation.

The medical facility and other benefits will be provided for the miner’s health in accordance

with the law. As per Mines Rule-1955, periodical medical examination thereafter of every

person employed in the mine at intervals of not more than five years will be arranged. The said

examination shall be so arranged over a period of five years that one fifth of the persons

employed at the mine undergo the examination every year.

2.7.8 Water requirement

Mining & its associated activities requires 7 kLD. The baseline information on ground and

surface water regime is very important. Water availability and water quality are the two major

aspects to be considered for baseline status of water environment.



The water in mining operations is mostly used for green area development, dust suppression,

water sprinkling on road, vehicle washing and for domestic use. The total water requirement

for the proposed mining activity is 7 kLD. The specific water consumption for various purposes

is worked out and is given in Table 2-18.

Table 2-17 Water Consumption

S.

No. Particulars Quantity (kLD) Source

1 Domestic purpose (mine and ancillary) 1.0

Bore Well and Open

well

2 Dust Suppression / Water sprinkling at

mine 4.0

3 Greenbelt / Plantation 2.0

Total 7.0

Figure 2.10 Water Usage Diagram

2.7.9 Waste management

Liquid Waste: The liquid waste generated in the quarry site composed by surface runoff water

and domestic sewage. The runoff water will be managed with garland drains, silt traps and

checks dams. The sewage to a tune of 0.8KLD generated from the mine office will be treated

in septic tank and finally to soak pit discharge.

Solid Waste: The topsoil excavated from the quarry will be dumped separately at pre-

determined place and subsequently will be utilized in spreading over reclamation areas for

plantation. Precautions will be taken to limit the height of the topsoil dump to 5 to 6 meters in

7kLD

Bore well & Open well

2kLD

Greenbelt/Planation

4kLD

Dust Suppression

1kLD

Domestic use

0.5kLD

Soak Pit



order to preserve its fertility and shelf life. Also, we shall provide a retaining wall surround the

dumping area having height of 2-3 m, which help to avoid the soil erosion. It will be suitably

protected from soil erosion and infertility by planting fodder grass and leguminous plants

during temporary storage. A good mining practice is to store the topsoil for reuse. The topsoil

is the most valuable resource for re-vegetation after mining, as it contains the majority of the

seeds, roots and microorganisms. Simultaneously replanting (which begins during mining

operations- after first year onwards) is very important because if topsoil is stockpiled for a long

period of time, its quality deteriorates.

General Dumping Practices

• During the planning stage identification of waste storage yard and topsoil should be

done based on slope and runoff characteristics. The individual dump will have

maximum slope of 37o and an overall slope not exceed 28o.

• The completed dumps and the back-filled areas will be afforested in a planned way to

increase their stability.

• The topsoil prior to drilling and blasting will be stacked at designated area surrounded

by embankment to prevent erosion. The topsoil dumps will be stabilized by plantation

and retaining wall.

• The external dump will have stretches of retaining wall at suitable locations and the

wall will be constructed with suitable height (2.5m) and top surface.

• The wall will have weep holes to drain out water to the garland drain.

• Runoff from the mine and waste dumps should be regulated by constructing check dams

and garland drains. Garland drains should be constructed on all side of quarries and

dumping yards. All the garland drains should be routed through adequately sized catch

pits or settling pits to remove suspended solids from flowing into storm water.

• Plantation on the topsoil dumps can only be taken up after dumping activity is stopped

and the site is proposed for plantation. A layer of topsoil should be spread over the area

and roughly levelled. Coir net / blanket should be spread, and native grass seed mix

should be broadcasted uniformly on prepared slope.

Reclamation Practices

The topsoil stabilisation is important from the environmental and aesthetic point of view. The

most common method of stabilisation is reusing by plantation. Back filled topsoil are generally

reclaimed by tree species as plantation improves the moisture contents, bulk density, pH and

overall nutrient contents of soils. Maintain a reverse slope in all benches during the operational

phase to avoid the erosion of back filled Soil and maintain a small channel in the bottom terrain

of the benches.

2. 8. Mine Closure

This mine is having life of 10 years and as per norms the progressive mine closure plan is

applicable instead of Mine closure plan. The mine closure plan shall be prepared 5 years before



expiry of the mine which covers technical, environmental, social, legal and financial aspects

dealing with progressive and post closure activities.

While formulating the closure objectives for the site, it is important to consider the pre-mining

land use of the site and how the operation will affect this activity. The primary aim is to ensure

that the following broad objectives along with the abandonment of the mine can be successfully

achieved:

• To create a productive and sustainable after-use for the site, acceptable to mine owners,

regulatory agencies, and the public.

• To protect public health and safety of the surrounding habitation.

• To minimize environmental damage.

• To conserve valuable attributes and aesthetics.

• To overcome adverse socio-economic impacts.

The criteria involved in mine closure are discussed below:

Physical Stability:

All anthropogenic structures, which include mine workings, dumping, buildings, will be well

stabilised during the mining activities, so that it will be physically stable even after the

decommissioning of mine. This will not have any hazard to public health and safety. Mine

benches shall be designed in such way to have good stability and good factor of safety, the

proposed design and factors of safety will take full account of extreme events such as floods,

hurricane, winds or earthquakes, and other natural perpetual forces like erosion, etc.

Chemical Stability

During the mining operations no hazardous chemicals are used for any activity in mine and

also granite building stone is chemically inert, so this mining project will not have any

Chemical impact on the topsoil and waste generated.

The solid wastes (topsoil) from this mine stacked separately so as to maintain chemically stable.

This means that the consequences of chemical changes or conditions will not lead to leaching

of metals, salts or organic compounds and will neither endanger public health and safety nor

result in the deterioration of environmental attributes.

Biological Stability:

The biological stability of the mine site itself is closely related to rehabilitation and final land

use. Nevertheless, biological stability can significantly influence physical or chemical stability

by stabilizing soil cover, Erosion/wash off are prevented by developing vegetation cover on

waste dumps and in green belt area.

A vegetation cover over the disturbed site is usually one of the main objectives of the

rehabilitation program, as vegetation cover is the best long-term method of stabilizing the site

and it will be carried during mining period itself and also before the closure of mine.



Valuable attributes, Aesthetics and Socio-Economics at end of the mine:

More important is given to for re-vegetation, management of soil nutrient levels. Additions of

nutrients are carried out under necessary situations to the topsoil. The progressive mine closure

plan is a part of approved mine plan. Stage wise progressive mine closure plan with budget

available financial / manpower is prepared will be implemented stage wise. The progressive

mine closure plan which is a part of the approved mining plan of the proposed mining lease.



Chapter 3. DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 General

This chapter provides the description of the existing environmental status of the study area with

reference to the environmental attributes like air, water, noise, soil, land use, ecology and

biodiversity, socio economics, etc. The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge

the baseline conditions which are described with respect to climate, atmospheric conditions,

water quality, soil quality, ecology, socio economic profile, land use and places of

archaeological importance. This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for one season

months from January 2020 to March 2020, representing winter season. Secondary data was

collected from various Government and Semi-Government organizations.

3.2 Study Area for EIA

The study area is the area within a radius of 10 km of proposed lease area, as per the ToR. The

study area includes the "core zone" and "buffer zone". As specifically mentioned in EIA

Notification and as well as on the basis of "Environmental Impact Assessment Guidance

Manual for Mining of Minerals projects" published by Ministry of Environment & Forests,

February, 2010, for carrying out an EIA study of a mining project, the mine lease area is called

as "core zone" and 10 km radius from the boundary limits of the mine lease area is called as

"buffer zone".

3.3 Land Use - Land Cover Study

3.3.1 Introduction

Remote sensing is the science of acquiring information about the Earth's surface without

actually being in contact with it. This is done by sensing and recording reflected or emitted

energy and processing, analysing, and applying that information. Satellite remote sensing

technology has found its acceptance worldwide for rapid resource assessment and monitoring.

Satellite images have been utilized for land use and land cover mapping.

Land use/land cover data refers to data that is a result of classifying raw satellite data into "land

use and land cover" (LULC) categories based on the return value of the satellite image. The

term “land use” (LU) relates to the human activity or economic function associated with a

specific piece of land, whereas the term “land cover” (LC) relates to the type of feature present

on the surface of the earth. In this study, the study area is considered as 10 km from the project

site in Athikkayam village, Pathanamthitta district in Kerala.

3.3.2 Objectives

➢ Delineation of Land use/ Land cover categories for the whole study area.

➢ Generation of digital cartographic database using secondary data sources

3.3.3 Satellite Image Analysis

Landsat 8 cloud free data has been used for Land use/ land cover analysis and SRTM data for

analyzing topographic features, the details of satellite image are as follows:



Satellite Data: Sentinel -2A cloud free data and CartoDEM data has been used for Land use/

Land cover analysis and drainage studies respectively. The details are given below:

1) Platform: Sentinel-2A

Satellite Sensor: Multi-Spectral Imager, Level-1C

Tile Number: T43PFL & T43PGL

Orbit Number: 19

Spatial Resolution: 10 m

Date of Pass: 28th February 2020

2) Platform: Cartosat-1

Satellite Sensor: PAN (2.5m) Stereo Data

Tile Number: C43Q

Spatial Resolution: 30 m (1 arc sec)

Ancillary Data: ArcGIS and ERDAS Image-processing software are used to classify the

image and for delineating drainage and other features in the study area.

Figure 3.1 shows the False Colour Composite (FCC) map of satellite data for the 10 km radius

area from the proposed project boundary site. Band combination (B8, B4, B3) was done from

the collected satellite data to create the standard FCC of the study area.

Figure 3.1 Satellite Map of Study area

Project Site

area



3.3.4 Land Use Land Cover Details

Satellite data was classified (Level II Classification) using supervised classification technique.

Maximum likelihood algorithm classifier was used for the analysis. Seven land use/ land cover

classes were identified in ten sq. km area around the project site as Table 3-1.

Figure 3.2 shows the information about the extent of land use/ land cover classes in the study

area.

Table 3-1 Land use/ Land cover Statistics of Area within 10 km Radius

LULC Classes Area (Ha) Percentage of total area (%)

Agricultural Land 10358.75 32.16

Fallow Land 3663.53 11.37

Mixed Vegetation 11278.92 35.02

Settlements 1198.34 3.72

Open Scrub/Open Area 1876.85 5.83

Barren Land 3519.39 10.93

Waterbody 313.17 0.97

Total 32208.95 100.00

Figure 3.2 Land use/Land cover of 10 km Study Area

Project Site

area



Generally, mixed land use/land cover visible in and around study area in which vegetation

(35.02%) was dominates in the present study followed by agricultural land (32.16%) covering

10 km surrounding the project site. Other land use land cover identified in the study were fallow

land (11.37%), barren land (10.93%), open scrub/open area (5.83%), settlements (3.72%) and

waterbody (0.97%). Due to the proposed mining, there were no variations in the existing land

use or land cover within the study area. But within in proposed project site there may be some

minor change in land use to mining area.

3.3.5 Contour Pattern of the Study Area

Contouring is the standard method of representing relief on topographic maps. Contour lines

are lines joining points of equal elevation on the surface of the ground. For a given map the

vertical distance between adjacent contour lines or the contour interval is fixed i.e., 30 m Figure

3.3. Topographic contour map of 10 km radius around project site shows an undulating terrain.

The Digital elevation model of study are is given in the Figure 3.4. The highest elevation in the

study area is 486 m.

Figure 3.3 Digital Elevation model of 10 km study area

Project Site

area



Figure 3.4 Contour map of 10 km radius around project site

3.3.6 Drainage Map of the Study Area

A drainage system is the pattern formed by the streams, rivers, and lakes in a particular drainage

basin. Drainage basins can be described by the order of streams within them. Streams that have

no tributaries (or streams flowing into it) are termed first order streams. When the first order

streams join together, they become second order steam. Two second order streams join to form

third order stream and so on for forth and further orders. However, a stream may have a

tributary with a lower order without becoming a higher order stream. Strahler method of

ordering was used for giving order to drainage. Highest order drainage in the study area is 5th

order. Drainage map of a study area shows in Figure 3.5. Drainage pattern within 10 km radius

around project site shows dendritic type of drainage pattern. The Pampa river passes through

the study area.

Project Site

area



Figure 3.5 Drainage Pattern of 10 km Study Area

3.3.7 Landslide Hazard study in the Area

Due to steep slopes, the north-east part of the district is prone to landslides, especially during

the rainy season. However, the proposed site does not belong in the landslide prone area. The

Pathanamthitta district falls under seismic zone III of ISI Classification. The Map for Hazards

like Landslide, Flood, Drought and earthquake is shown below as per the Landslide

Susceptibility Zones of Pathanamthitta Districts of Kerala (NCESS, 2010). From the below

maps it is evident that the portion of proposed land area is coming under medium hazard zone

as shown in the Figure 3.6.

Project Site

area



Figure 3.6: Landslide Map

3.3.8 Soil Characteristics

The soil sample is collected from the core zone and buffer zone since the project is not likely

to affect the land use outside core zone. Samples are collected through hand auger boring up to

a depth of 15 to 30 cm. The location coordinates of sampling were given in Table 3-2 and

Figure 3.7.

Table 3-2 Details of Soil Sampling Locations

Sl

No: Location

Location

Code

Location

coordinates

Distance and

Direction from

Mine Lease

area

Zone

(Core/

Buffer)

1 Within core zone S1 9°24'56.28"N

76°50'24.65"E -- CORE

2

Near to residence

of Joseph,

Vellolimala

S2 9°24'46.33"N

76°50'17.15"E 352 m – South BUFFER



Figure 3.7 Soil Sampling Locations

Soil sampling results

The soil sample was collected in presence of the functional area experts and analysed by NABL

accredited laboratory, during February 2020 the results are given in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3 Soil Characteristics

Sl.No. Parameter Unit Method Result

S1 S2

1. Soil Type - - Sandy clay Sandy clay

2. Colour - - Brownish

Red

Brownish

Red

3. Moisture

content %

IS 2720(Pt 2)-

1973 3.63 3.24

4. Conductivity µS/cm IS 14767:2000 84 67

5. pH at 25oC - IS 2720(Pt 26)-

1987 6.73 6.48

6. Organic Carbon mg/100gm IS 2720(Pt 22)-

1972 528.86 509.77



Sl.No. Parameter Unit Method Result

S1 S2

7. Total nitrogen mg/100gm IS 14684-1999 318.35 309.23

8. Phosphorus mg/100gm IS 10158-1982 4.19 4.50

9. Chlorides mg/100gm USEPA 9212 41.63 37.10

10. Sodium

Absorption ratio - USEPA 3050B 3.46 3.16

11.

Cation

Exchange

Capacity

meq/100g IS 2720(Pt 24)-

1976 3.40 3.22

The soil analysis data indicate that the pH values ranges from 6.48 to 6.73. Soil pH plays an

important role in the availability of nutrients. Soil microbial activity as well as solubility of

metal ions is also dependent on pH. Electrical Conductivity value ranges from 67 µS/cm

to 84 µS/cm. The proposed mining area is mostly exposed rock area and the thickness of top

soil is only 1-1.5 m and poor in nutrients values and not productive from the agriculture view

point.

3.4 Geology and Hydrogeology

3.4.1 Geomorphology

Physiographically, the district can be divided into three distinct units viz. the coastal plains in

the northwest, the midland region and the high hills to the east. The coastal plain is

characterised by fluvial landforms, which extend further west to Alappuzha district. The coastal

plain in the western part of the area is restricted to Pulikeezh block of the district with an area

of 82 sq km. The mid land region in the western part of the district is of undulating terrain of

low and broad valleys with some valleys becoming narrow close to the foothills. The major

part of the area in this region is characterized by thick laterite cover. The midland region has

elevations ranging from 30m to 300m. It is characterised by undulating topography with

numerous small ridges, spurs and laterite interfluves, with moderate to gentle slope, intervened

by narrow valleys. The hilly region to the east is relatively wide and occupies a major part of

the district. The foothills of Western Ghats form the hill ranges in the eastern part of the district.

The area is characterised by steep hills, narrow gorges and precipitous escarpments and is

thickly forested. The hills that are either structural or denudational in origin are very steep with

narrow summits. Some of the peaks in the east area are more than 150m high and form part of

the Western Ghats



3.4.2 Geology

Geologically, the district forms part of the Precambrian metamorphic shield comprising (i)

Charnockite Group, Khondalite Group and Megmatite Complex of Archaean age, (ii) Acid

intrusive of Proterozoic age and (iii) rocks of Cenozoic age (basic intrusive, Neogene and

Quaternary). Charnockite group is the dominant formation of the area within which occur

concordant, linear and lensoidal bodies of calc granulite and quartzite of Khondalite Group.

The Charnockite Group comprises Charnockite (hypersthenes granite), pyroxene-granulite and

cordierite gneiss. Charnockite is the dominant rock and its variants are charnockite gneiss,

massive charnockite and hypersthenes-diopside gneiss. The rock is generally dark grey and

crudely foliated. Cordierite gneiss occurs as impersistent bands within charnockite, while

pyroxene granulite is seen as restites, mostly in the west. At places, charnockite is migmatised

resulting in the formation of biotite gneiss, and garnet-biotite gneiss (Migmatite Complex).

These rocks are predominant towards south. The area witnessed a period of igneous activity

during the Proterozoic as evidenced from the granite and syeno-granite (acid intrusive) bodies.

Pegmaite and quartz veins traverse the older rocks parallel to the regional foliation. Basic

igneous activity, probably of Late Mesozoic age, is evidenced from the dolerite and gabbro

dykes cutting across the older rocks. These dykes have a general NW-SE trend. Warkalli

sediment of Neogene age are exposed near Thiruvalla. Along the western margin, the basement

and sedimentary rocks have been lateritised. The Quaternary sediment mostly of fluvial origin,

are the flood plain deposits and the valley fills

Based on the morphology, physical and chemical properties, the soils of the district are

classified as Forest Loam, Lateritic, Brown hydromorphic, Riverine alluvium and Greyish

Onattukara soils.

The diversity of the parental rock, the climatic conditions and differential weathering has led

to the formation of these different soil types. Forest loam is the product of weathering of the

country rock under forest cover. Forest loamy soil is encountered in the eastern parts of the

district, in major parts of Ranni and Ranny blocks. Lateritic soil is the most widely occurring

soil type in the district. This soil is the product of lateralization of the crystallines and

sedimentaries under humid tropical conditions. Brown hydromorphic soil occurs mostly in

valley portions in the midland area of the district. The soil is formed as a result of transportation

and deposition of material from the adjoining hill slopes under impeded drainage conditions.

Riverine alluvium occurs mostly along the banks of rivers and their tributaries. Greyish

Onattukara soil is having very limited occurrence in the district and is restricted to the western

parts of Pulikeezh block. (Source: District Survey Report, Department of Mining & Geology,

Pathanamthitta).

3.4.3 Hydrogeology

Pathanamthitta district is underlain by geological formations ranging in age from Archaean to

Recent. About 96% of the area of the district is underlain by crystalline rocks of Archaean age,

which have undergone weathering and lateralization. The Archaean group of rocks comprises

charnockites and gneisses along with minor occurrence of pyroxene granulites and are

traversed by pegmatite and quartz veins. There are several basic dykes of doleritic and gabbroic



composition cutting across the crystalline rocks. The crystalline rocks have undergone several

phases of deformation and have suffered intensive fracturing and dislocations. The regional

strike of foliation in charnockites and gneisses is generally NW – SE with variation from NNW

– SSE to WNW – ESE with steep southerly dips ranging between 60o and 80o. There is one

major shear zone – the Achenkovil Shear trending in NW – SE direction along which the

Achenkovil River flows. The rest of the area in the north-western parts of the district is

underlain by Tertiary sediments equivalent to the Cuddalore and Rajahmundry sandstones of

east coast with a capping of Recent Alluvium. Lithologically these rocks are composed of

carbonaceous clay with lignite, sandstone and grit with alternate lenses and beds of variegated

clays.



(Source: Ground water information booklet of Pathanamthitta district prepared by Central Ground Water Board)

Figure 3.8 Hydrogeology Map of Pathanamthitta District

Project Site




Figure 3.9 Depth to water level - Pre monsoon

Project Site




Figure 3.10: Depth to water level- Post monsoon

Project Site



3.4.4 Groundwater Resources

Groundwater in Pathanamthitta district occurs under phreatic condition in the alluvium,

laterites and weathered crystallines. It occurs under semi-confined to confined conditions in

Tertiary sediments and deep-seated fractured aquifers in crystalline rocks.

The important aquifer systems in the district are: The weathered, fissured and fractured

crystalline formations, semi-consolidated Tertiary formations, laterites and the alluvial

formation. The summary of the ground water resource of the Pathanamthitta district is given

Table 3-4.

Table 3-4 Groundwater Resources of Pathanamthitta District

Sr.No Particulars Quantity

1 Net annual groundwater availability 284.11 MCM

2 Annual Groundwater Draft 94.24MCM

3 Projected Demand for Domestic and industrial Uses up to

2025

63.04 MCM

4 Stage of Groundwater Development (%) 33.13% (SAFE)

Source: Groundwater information booklet of Pathanamthitta District

3.4.5 Ground Water Condition

Ground water is a prime natural resource essential for the subsistence of life and is a basic human

need. It is the water present beneath Earth’s surface in soil pore spaces and in the fractures of

rock formations. The occurrence and movement of Ground water is controlled by several factors

such as climate, hydrology, geology, topography, and ecology and soil distribution.

A detailed study has been done to evaluate how the mining will affect the groundwater level of

Athikkayam Village, around 1km radius from the proposed project site. The well census was

carried out in 18 wells around 1km radius in Athikayam village from project site. Data were

collected from the wells is provided in Table 3-5.

Table 3-5 Details of Wells Inventoried in and Around Quarry

Station Code Location Distance

from Mine

Total

Water

Depth

m

Water level

M amsl

Premonsoon Monsoon

GW1 9° 24'40.9"N

76°50'21.08"E 430 m 6.95 6.95 m 1 m

GW2 9° 24'37.40"N

76°50'21.10"E 540 m 6.40 5.7 m 1 m

GW3 9° 24'37.76"N

76°50'30.03"E 560 m 7.40 4.9 1.2



Station Code Location Distance

from Mine

Total

Water

Depth

m

Water level

M amsl

Premonsoon Monsoon

GW4 9° 24'38.93"N

76°50'9.77"E 680 m 7 m 4.7 m 1 m

GW5 9° 24'46.10"N

76°50'17.70"E 340 m 9.15 m 8.8 m 0.50 m

GW6 9° 25'19.50"N

76°50'5.60"E 680 m 8.8 m 8.6 m 1 m

GW7 9° 25'15.25"N

76°50'5.32"E 600 m 6.25 m 5.8 m 1.2 m

GW8 9° 25'5.04"N

76°49'53.00"E 870 m 5.9 m 4.52 m 1 m

GW9 9° 25'6.50"N

76°50'8.40"E 400 m 8.3 m 7.6 m 3 m

GW10 9° 25'22.56"N

76°50'7.72"E 720 m 8.8 m 8.35 m 3.0 m

GW11 9° 25'22.70"N

76°50'21.30"E 610 m 7.15 m 6.15 m 2 m

GW12 9° 25'12.20"N

76°50'26.20"E 330 m 6.5 m 6.3 m 0.7 m

GW13 9° 25'13.10"N

76°50'24.10"E 310 m 6.8 m 6.4 m 1.2 m

GW14 9° 25'26.67"N

76°50'41.22"E 860 m 7.55 m 6.6 m 3 m

GW15 9° 25'23.62"N

76°50'43.72"E 830 m 5.5 m 4.8 m 1.8 m

GW16 9° 24'56.41"N

76°50'56.27"E 920 m 6.25 m 5.8 m 1.2 m

GW17 9° 24'51.49"N

76°50'51.59"E 910 m 5.85 m 4.1 m 1.5 m

GW18 9° 24'44.36"N

76°50'51.59"E 940 m 9.7 m 8.7 m 1 m



Figure 3.11 Wells Inventoried Locations

A total of 18 wells were surveyed and documented for the study. The depth to water level is

found that varying form 4.1m-8.8m below ground level (bgl) during pre-monsoon and varies

from 0.5m-3m bgl during monsoon season. The proposed site is situated in almost top of a

small hillock. As per the scheme of mining, approved by the concerned district geologist, the

excavation for extraction of granite building stone is not going to cross the local ground water

level. Since proper drainage plan has been envisaged, the operation of granite building stone

quarry is not going to affect the local ground water conditions.

3.5 Meteorology

The meteorological data helps for appropriate interpretation of the baseline status of the study

area as well as for input into prediction models to evaluate air quality dispersion. Chronological

data on meteorological parameters also plays an important role in identifying the general

meteorological regime of the region. The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:

• Winter season : December to February

• Pre-monsoon season : March to May

• Monsoon season : June to September

• Post-monsoon season : October to November

3.5.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the standard norms laid

down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS: 8829) and India Meteorological Department (IMD).



Automatic Meteorological station has been installed near to the proposed quarry. The

parameters recorded along with frequency of recording are given in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6 Meteorology Parameters Monitoring Frequency

S.N. Parameter Instrument Frequency

1 Wind Speed Automatic Weather Station

Continuous Automatic

hourly average 2 Wind Direction

4 Max. & Min Temperature Wet & Dry Bulb Thermometer Hourly Average

5 Relative Humidity Hygrometer Hourly Average

6 Rainfall Rain Gauge Daily

Table 3-7 Meteorological Data during the study period

Month Temperature (0C) Avg.Relative

Humidity (%)

Wind Speed(m/s)

Max Min Avg Max Min Avg Max Min Avg.

JAN 32.2 22.78 27.7 100 62 78.11 5.4 0 1.96

FEB 32.22 23.89 28.8 100 48 74.26 5.36 0 2.25

MAR 33.89 25 29.67 94 46 70.65 6.26 0 2.40

Figure 3.12 Temperature at Proposed Quarry during Study Period

From the Figure 3.12, it can be observed that highest temperature was observed in the month

of march (i.e., 33.890C) and lowest temperature in January (22.780C). Slightly a gradual

increase in temperature was observed during the study period.

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

JAN FEB MAR

Tem

per

atu

re i

n o

C

Study period

Temperature (0C) Max

Temperature (0C) Min

Temperature (0C) Avg



Figure 3.13 Relative Humidity at Proposed Quarry during study Period

Variations in the relative humidity are shown in Figure 3.13. From the figure it is understood

that maximum hourly relative Humidity was observed is 100%. Whereas minimum relative

humidity was observed in march (46%).

Figure 3.14 Wind speed at the proposed quarry during study period

From the figure 3.14, the maximum hourly wind speed reported at the site is 6.26 m/s during

March, and minimum is zero. The predominant wind directions during the study period were

from West & North-West as shown in Figure 3.15. The frequency of 3-4m/s wind is dominating

for the study period. The Highest wind speed is 6.26m/s from the direction North-West.

0

20

40

60

80

100

JAN FEB MAR

Hu

mid

ity i

n %

Study period

Avg.Relative Humidity

(%) Max


(%) Min


(%) Avg

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

JAN FEB MAR

Win

d s

pee

d i

n m

/s

Study period

Wind Speed(m/s) Max

Wind Speed(m/s) Min

Wind Speed(m/s) Avg.



Figure 3.15 Windrose Diagram during Study Period



3.6 Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone around the proposed project area forms

the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the region are traffic, urban

rural activities and industrial activities (existing mining activities). The study area represents

mostly rural environment.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling,

analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. The results of monitoring carried out for

study period January 2020 to March 2020 representing winter season are presented in Table 3-

11 and Table 3-12.

3.6.1 Methodology Adopted for Air Quality Survey

Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The designs of monitoring network in the air

quality surveillance programme have been based on the following considerations:

• Meteorological conditions on synoptic basis;

• Topography of the study area;

• Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status; and

• Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at four locations. Table 3-8

gives the details of environmental setting around each monitoring station. The location of the

selected stations with reference to the project area is given in the same table and shown in

Figure 3.16.

Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out with a frequency of two days per week

during study period. The baseline data of air environment was monitored for parameters

mentioned below as per revised MoEF notification dated 16th November 2009:

• Particulate Matter (PM10)

• Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

• Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

• Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

• Carbon Monoxide (CO)

Sampling and Analytical Techniques

Respirable Dust Samplers (RDS) APM-460 & Fine Particulate samplers APM-550 (Make:

Envirotech Instruments Pvt Ltd) instruments have been used for sampling of PM10 and PM2.5



respectively. Gaseous attachments along with APM 460 have been used for gaseous pollutants

like SO2 and NOx.

PM10 (<10m) present in ambient air is drawn through the cyclone of RDS. Coarse and non-

respirable dust (>10m) is separated from the air stream by centrifugal forces acting on the

solid particles. These separated particulates fall through the cyclone’s conical hopper and

collect in the sampling cup placed at the bottom of the cyclone. The dust (<10 microns) forming

the respirable fraction passes through the cyclone and is retained by the filter paper.

PM2.5 (<2.5m) present in ambient air is drawn through the cyclone separator and WINS

Impactor of FPS. Coarse and non-respirable dust (>10m) is separated from the air stream by

centrifugal forces acting on the solid particles at cyclone separator. These separated air pass

through the WINS Impactor and collect particles size between 10m – 2.5m. The dust

(<2.5m) passes through the PTFE filter papers and is retained by the filter paper.

A tapping is provided on the suction side of the blower of RDS to provide suction for sampling

air through a set of impingers. Samples of gases SO2 and NOx are drawn at a flow rate of 1

lpm. The air samples were analysed as per standard methods specified in IS: 5182 and Central

Pollution Control Board (CPCB) guidelines.

Non-Dispersive Infra-Red (NDIR) techniques have been used for the monitoring of Carbon

Monoxide (CO).

The techniques used for ambient air quality monitoring and minimum detectable levels are

given in Table 3-9.

Table 3-8 Details of AAQ Monitoring Locations

Sl

No:

Location Locat

ion

Code

Location

coordinates

Distance

and

Direction

from Mine

Lease area

Zone

(Core/Buf

fer)

Remarks

1

Main Entrance of

proposed quarry

site

A1N1 9°25'07"N

76°50'21"E - Core Zone -

2

Residence of

Joseph, south to the

proposed quarry,

Vellolimala

A2N2 9°24'46.33"N

76°50'17.15"E 330m - SSW

Buffer

Zone

Residential

Area

3

Residential of Anil

Kumar area near to

Valyelimala

A3N3 9°25'32.23"N

76°50'27.55"E 940m - N Buffer Residential

4

Residential area

near to the nearby

quarry M/s

Manimaleth

Crusher Industries

A4N4 9°24'51.00"N

76°51'3.00"E 1.05km E Buffer Residential



Table 3-9 Techniques used For AAQ Analyses

Duration of Sampling

The duration of sampling of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, and NOx was each twenty four hourly continuous

sampling per day and CO was sampled for 8 hours continuous. The monitoring was conducted

for two days in a week for three months. The ambient air quality parameters along with their

frequency of sampling are given in Table 3-10.

Figure 3.16: Ambient Air Quality Sampling locations

Parameters Technique

Technical

protocol

Minimum

detection

Limit

Particulate Matter of size

less than 10 μm (PM10)

Gravimetric Method IS 5182 Part 23 5.0 μg/m3

Particulate Matter of size

less than 2.5 μm (PM2.5)

Gravimetric Method CPCB Guideline 3.0 μg/m3

Sulphur Dioxide Improved West and Gaeke IS 5182 Part 2 5.0 μg/m3

Nitrogen Dioxide Modified Jacob and

Hochheiser

IS 5182 Part 6 5.0 μg/m3

Carbon Monoxide (8hrs) Non Dispersive Infra-Red

Spectroscopy(NDIR)

IS 5182 Part 10 0.1 mg/m3



Figure 3.17 Photographs of Air Sampling Stations

Table 3-10 Parameters and Frequency of Sampling

Parameters Sampling Frequency

Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly samples twice a week for three months

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) 24 hourly samples twice a week for three months

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hourly samples twice a week for three months



3.6.2 Presentation of AAQ Data

Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, maximum and minimum values have

been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The summary

of these results for each location are presented in Table 3-11and Table 3-12. These are compared

with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for industrial and rural

/residential zone.



Table 3-11 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results – Winter Season (2020)

Station

Code

Name of the

Location

PM10 (g/m3) PM2.5 (g/m3) SO2 (g/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

%le

Min Max Avg 98th

%le

Min Max Avg 98th

%le

A1N1 Main Entrance of

proposed quarry

site

50.68 64.60 58.38 63.91 13.63 19.72 16.78 19.71 6.42 8.74 7.35 8.68

A2N2 Residence of

Joseph, south to

the proposed

quarry,

Vellolimala

50.63 63.82 57.98 63.35 13.42 19.82 16.57 19.20 5.40 9.21 7.05 8.90

A3N3 Residential of

Anil Kumar area

near to

Valyelimala

53.60 62.31 58.92 61.89 13.30 19.72 16.93 19.71 5.90 9.10 7.41 8.97

A4N4 Residential area

near to the

nearby quarry

M/s Manimaleth

Crusher

Industries

50.43 63.80 58.21 62.93 12.30 19.70 16.13 19.49 5.29 8.80 7.27 8.80

NAAQ standards 100 60 80



Table 3-12 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results – Winter Season (2020)

Station Code Name of the

Location

NOx (g/m3) CO (mg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

%le

Min Max Avg 98th

%le

A1N1 Main Entrance of

proposed quarry

site

7.20 9.65 8.43 9.48 0.60 0.90 0.70 0.85

A2N2 Residence of

Joseph, south to

the proposed

quarry, Vellolimala

6.50 9.62 8.01 9.58 0.50 0.90 0.70 0.85

A3N3 Residential of Anil

Kumar area near to

Valyelimala

6.60 10.40 8.27 10.02 0.60 0.90 0.74 0.90

A4N4 Residential area

near to the nearby

quarry M/s

Manimaleth

Crusher Industries

6.59 9.82 8.08 9.69 0.50 0.90 0.75 0.90

NAAQ standards 80 2


Prepared by SBA Enviro Systems Pvt Ltd P a g e | 87

Observations of Primary Data

The observations for winter season 2020 are summarized below:

Particulate Matter (PM10):

A maximum value of 63.82 g/m3 was observed at the A2 and minimum value of 50.43 g/m3

was observed at A4.

Respirable Particulate Matter (PM2.5):

A maximum value of 19.82 g/m3 was observed at A2 and minimum value of 12.30 g/m3 was

observed at A4.

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2):

Maximum concentration of SO2 is observed to be 9.21 g/m3 at A2 and minimum value of 5.29

g/m3 observed at A3.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX):

Maximum concentration of NOx is observed to be 10.4 g/m3 at A2 and minimum value of 6.59

g/m3 observed at A2.

Carbon Monoxide (CO):

Maximum concentrations in the region are observed to be 0.9 mg/m3 at all stations and

minimum value of 0.5 mg/m3 observed at A2 & A4 stations.

The overall air quality around the proposed quarry is within the limits of NAAQ standards.

3.7 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of surface and ground water resources in the study area have

been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluate anticipated impact of the quarry.

Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of EIA and to identify critical issues

with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.

The purpose of this study is to:

• Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

• Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions, recreational

resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and

• Predict impact on water quality by this project and related activities.

The information required has been collected through primary surveys and secondary sources.

3.7.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken, and monitoring locations were finalized based on:

• Drainage pattern

• Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact areas;



• Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

One surface water and two ground water sources in the study area were examined for physico-

chemical and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of quarry and other activities

on surface and ground water. The samples were analyzed essential parameters as per the Drinking

water specification IS 10500: 2012.

Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples for

bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-chemical and

bacteriological parameters have been analysed for projecting the existing water quality status in

the study area. Parameters like temperature, Dissolved Oxygen (DO) and pH were analysed at

the time of sample collection.

The methodology for sample collection and preservation techniques was followed as per the

Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) mentioned in Table 3-13.

Table 3-13 SOP for Water and Wastewater Sampling and Analysis

Parameter Sample Collection Storage/ Preservation

pH at 250C Grab sampling Plastic /glass

container

On site analysis

Odour As above On site parameter

Colour As above Refrigeration,

can be stored for 7 days

Turbidity As above Refrigeration,

can be stored for 7 days

Total Dissolved

Solids

As above Refrigeration, 48 hrs

Total Hardness as

CaCO3

As above Add HNO3 to pH<2, refrigeration;

6 months

Chloride as Cl As above Not required; 28 days

Sulphate as SO4 As above Refrigeration; 28 days

Alkalinity as CaCO3 Plastic container Not required; 6 months

Iron as Fe Plastic containers Refrigeration; 48 hrs

Calcium as Ca Plastic containers only Not required; 28 days

Magnesium as Mg Plastic/ glass containers Refrigeration; 14 days

Analytical Techniques

The sampling and analytical techniques are given in Table 3-14.

Table 3-14 Analytical Techniques for Water and Wastewater analysis

Parameter Method

pH at 250C Cl.2 of IS 3025 (Pt 11):1983, Reaff. 2017

Odour IS 3025 (Pt 5):1983, Reaff. 2012

Colour Cl. 2 of IS 3025 (Pt 4):1983, Reaff. 2017

Turbidity IS 3025 (Pt 10):1984, Reaff. 2017



Parameter Method

Total Dissolved Solids IS 3025(Pt 16):1984, Reaff. 2017

Total Hardness as CaCO3 Cl. 5 of IS 3025(Pt 21):2009, Reaff. 2014

Chloride as Cl Cl. 2 of IS 3025(Pt 32):1988, Reaff. 2014

Sulphate as SO4 Cl. 4 of IS 3025(Pt 24):1986, Reaff. 2014

Alkalinity as CaCO3 Cl. 8.1 of IS 3025(Pt 23):1986,Reaff. 2014

Iron as Fe Cl. 6 of IS 3025 (Pt 53):2003,Reaff. 2014

Calcium as Ca Cl. 5of IS 3025(Pt 40):1991, Reaff. 2014

Magnesium as Mg Cl. 6 of IS 3025(Pt 46):1994, Reaff. 2014

3.7.2 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from one surface and two ground water locations. These samples

were taken as grab samples and were analysed for various parameters to compare with the

standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 for ground and surface water sources. The water

sampling location details are given in Table 3-15 and shown in Figure 3.16.

Table 3-15 Water Sampling Locations

Sl

No

Location Location

Code

Location

coordinates

Distance and

Direction from

Mine Lease

area

Depth of

water Table

1

Open well near to

St. George

Marthoma Church,

Athikkayam

GW 1 9°25'13"N

76°50'24"E 7 Open well

2

Bore well at

Residential of

joseph, Vellolimala

GW 2 9°24'46.33"N

76°50'17.15"E 30 Bore well

3 Pond near to

Madanthamon SW1

9°24'15.88"N

76°50'33.17"E - Pond



Figure 3.18: Water Sampling Locations

3.7.3 Presentation of Results

The analytical results of surface water and ground water samples are given in Table 3-16 and

Table 3-17. The quality of surface water samples was compared with surface water specification

IS 2296:1982 Class C and ground water samples were compared with drinking water

specification IS 10500:2012 standards.

Table 3-16 Ground Water Quality

Sl

No Parameters Unit Method

Result Require-

ment

(Acceptable

Limit as per

IS

10500:2012)

GW 1 GW 2

1 pH at 250C -

Cl.2 of IS 3025

(Pt 11):1983,

Reaff. 2012

6.52 6.71 6.5-8.5

2 Odour -

IS 3025 (Pt

5):1983, Reaff.

2012

Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

3 Colour

Hazen

Units,

max

Cl. 2 of IS 3025

(Pt 4):1983,

Reaff. 2012

4.0 4.0 5.0



Sl


Result Require-

ment

(Acceptable

Limit as per

IS

10500:2012)

GW 1 GW 2

4 Turbidity NTU,

max

IS 3025 (Pt

10):1984, Reaff.

2012

0.60 0.60 1.0

5

Total

Dissolved

Solids

mg/l,

max

IS 3025(Pt

16):1984, Reaff.

2006

58 54 500

6

Total

Hardness as

CaCO3

mg/l,

max

Cl. 5 of IS

3025(Pt 21):2009,

Reaff. 2012

15.52 13.58 200

7 Chloride as

Cl

mg/l,

max

Cl. 2 of IS

3025(Pt 32):1988,

Reaff. 2009

26.01 23.22 250

8 Sulphate as

SO4

mg/l,

max

Cl. 4 of IS

3025(Pt 24):1986,

Reaff. 2009

2.74 3.04 200

9 Alkalinity as

CaCO3

mg/l,

max

Cl. 8.1 of IS

3025(Pt 23):1986,

Reaff. 2009

6.24 8.32 200

10 Iron as Fe mg/l,max

Cl. 6 of IS 3025

(Pt 53):2003,

Reaff. 2009

0.04 0.05 0.3

11 Calcium as

Ca mg/l,max

Cl. 5of IS

3025(Pt 40):1991,

Reaff. 2009

3.89 3.11 75

12 Magnesium

as Mg mg/l,max

Cl. 6 of IS

3025(Pt 46):1994,

Reaff. 2009

1.41 1.41 30

13

E.coli or

thermotolera

nt coliform

bacteria

IS 1622 : 1981, Reaff.2009 Absent Absent

Shall not be

detectable in

any 100 ml

sample



Table 3-17 Surface water Quality

Sl


Result Requirement

(Acceptable

limit as per IS

2296:1982

Class E)

SW 1

1. pH at 250C ---

Cl.2 of IS 3025 (Pt

11):1983, Reaff.

2017

6.83 6.0-8.5

2. Chloride as Cl mg/l

Cl. 2 of IS 3025(Pt

32):1988, Reaff.

2014

11.15 600

3. Sulphate as SO4 mg/l

Cl. 4 of IS 3025(Pt

24):1986, Reaff.

2014

17.74 1000

4.

Conductivity μS/cm

IS 3025 (Pt

14):2013 144 2250

5. Free CO2 mg/l IS 3025 (Pt 61):

2008 6.30 --

6. Total Dissolved

Solids mg/l

IS 3025(Pt

16):1984, Reaff.

2017

86 2100

7. Silica as SiO2 mg/l

Cl. 3 of IS 3025 (Pt

35):1988, Reaff.

2014

1.32 --

8. Dissolved

Oxygen mg/l,min

Cl. 4.1 & 4.2 of IS

3025 (Pt 38):1989,

Reaff. 2014

5.10 --

9.

Biochemical

Oxygen Demand

@ 20°C for 5

days

mg/l,max

APHA 5210 B

4.30 --

10. Free Ammonia

mg/l

Cl. 2.3 of IS

3025(Pt 34):1988,

Reaff. 2014

0.18 --

11.

Total coliform

bacteria

(MPN/100ml)

nos IS: 1622:1981,

Reaff. 2014 60 --

3.7.4 Observations

Surface water quality station

All parameters are within desirable limits for all stations

Ground water quality 2 stations



All parameters are within desirable limits for all stations.

Figure 3.19 Water Sampling Photographs

3.8 Noise Level Survey

The environmental assessment of noise from the proposed quarrying activity and vehicular

traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to

hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses.

The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

• Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature).

It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously

varying in loudness;

• The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in

residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and

• The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which

determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced Hearing

Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels

and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by blasting and other quarrying

activities.

3.8.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major noise generating

sources in and around the quarry site area. Noise at different noise generating sources has been

identified based on the activities in the village area and ambient noise due to traffic.

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of ambient noise levels at four

locations in the study area for Winter season 2020. The noise levels at each location were

recorded for 24 hours. The environment setting of noise monitoring locations in four areas is

given in Table 3-18 and shown in Figure 3.20.



3.8.2 Method of Monitoring

Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The readings were

taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been monitored during 6 am to 10

pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the locations covered in 10 km radius of the study

area.

Table 3-18 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations

Sl

No

Location Locati

on

Code

Location

coordinates

Distance and

Direction from

Mine Lease

area

Zone

(Core/

Buffer)

1 Main Entrance of

proposed quarry site N1

9°25'07"N

76°50'21"E - Core Zone

2

Residence of Joseph,

south to the proposed

quarry, Vellolimala

N2 9°24'46.33"N

76°50'17.15"E 330m - SSW

Buffer

Zone

3

Residential of Anil

Kumar area near to

Valyelimala

N3 9°25'32.23"N

76°50'27.55"E 940m - N Buffer

4

Residential area near to

the nearby quarry M/s

Manimaleth Crusher

Industries

N4 9°24'51.00"N

76°51'3.00"E 1.05km E Buffer

3.8.3 Methodology of Data Generation

Instrument Used for Monitoring

Noise levels were measured using integrated sound level meter manufactured by Cygnet

(Baseline Technology). The integrating sound level meter is an integrating/logging type with

Octave filter attachment (model OB-100) with frequency range of 31.5 to 16000 Hz. This

instrument is capable of measuring the Sound Pressure Level (SPL), Leq and octave band

frequency analysis.

Method of Monitoring

Noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24 hours with one hour interval starting

at 06:00 hrs to 06:00 hrs next day. The noise levels were monitored on working days only and

not on Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays. During each hour, Leq were directly computed

by the instrument based on the sound pressure levels. Lday (Ld) and Lnight (Ln) values were

computed using corresponding hourly Leq of day and night respectively. Monitoring was carried

out at ‘A’ response and fast mode.

Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq):

The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same sound energy

as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is necessary because sound



from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given period of time. This is calculated from

the following equation:

60

)_LL(LL

29010

50eq +=

Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during day (6 am to

10 pm).

Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during night (10 pm

to 6 am).

Table 3-19 National Ambient Noise Level Standard

Area code Category of area Limits in dB(A)

Day Time Night Time

A Industrial 75 70

B Commercial 65 55

C Residential 55 45

D Silence 50 40

Figure 3.20: Noise Monitoring Locations



Figure 3.21 Photographs of Noise Monitoring

3.8.4 Presentation of Results

The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at four locations. The parameters are

analysed for Leq. The statistical analysis results are given in Table 3-20.

Table 3-20 Noise Levels [dB (A)] in the Study Area

Ambient Noise Level at Location (Leq dB(A)) Category of

Area

CPCB

Standard (Leq

dB(A)) Location N1 N2 N3 N4

Day Time 52.5 50.6 51.8 53.1 Residential

Area

55

Night Time 40.4 41.8 42.3 40.8 45

• Noise level-Day time & Night time

Noise levels were monitored in the project site and villages within the study area. The noise

levels ranged between 50.6 to 53.1 dB (A) during day time and noise levels ranged between

40.4 to 42.3 dB (A) during night time.



3.9 Ecology and Biodiversity

3.9.1 Introduction

Ecological evaluation aims at developing and applying methodologies to assess the relevance

of an area for nature conservation. As such, it is to support the assessment of the impact of a

proposed development by providing guidance on how to describe the ecological features within

the area affected, how to value them, and how to predict the value losses caused by the

development. The evaluation of the ecological significance of an area can be undertaken from

different perspectives and consequently with different objectives. One of such perspectives

focuses on the conservation of the biological diversity or biodiversity. Among the human

activities that pose the highest threat to the conservation of biodiversity are the developmental

projects in particular. Such projects represent artificial elements that cut through the landscape

and interfere with the natural habitat and its conditions by emissions that may be solid, liquid

and or gaseous. This in turn influences the abundance and distribution of plant and animal

species, i.e., the biodiversity of the areas impacted.

Most of the background data needs to be acquired from the governmental agencies or the

scientific literature. This information is typically complemented by field visit, site surveys and

sample collection. The description of the actual ecological assessment provided by the

ecological baseline study serves to set a reference for the subsequent impact analysis. The study

is carried out for both core zone and buffer zone.

3.9.2 Objectives of the study

The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:

• To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project site

• To evaluate the distribution of animal life spectra, including avifauna and butterflies,

available in this area

• To ascertain whether the proposed project will have any adverse impact on the ecology in

and around project areas, and suggest mitigation measures, if needed.

3.9.3 Brief Description of the Project Area

Biodiversity assessment was done for both the project core zone and buffer zone. The core

zone is divided into two as mining area and 7.5m Greenbelt barrier zone. A major portion of

the proposed site is visible for exposed rocks. The vegetation can be mainly seen in the green

belt barrier zone. The area is surrounded by Hevea brasiliensis cultivation and is having higher

growth of Holarrhena pubescens and Terminalia paniculata. Advanced regeneration of

Terminalia paniculata is observed in the site.



A view from Site

3.9.4 Biodiversity Survey Methods

Plants

Within the proposed project site, sample plots of 10 m X 10 m were laid along

altitudinal gradient. Within each sample plot all woody species (trees, shrubs) were recorded.

Herbaceous and graminoid species were recorded in a 1 m X 1 m subplot laid within the larger

plot.

Mammals

For Mammals assessment, both direct and indirect faunal survey methodologies were

employed. By direct observation, rapid survey of the wildlife resource of the area has been

assessed by selecting representative vantage points in five observations zones. Walking along

transects lines was also applied. In case of indirect observation, main emphasis has been given

for identifying mammals’ sign, like analyzing the animals foot print, burrows, skeleton, fecal

materials, hairs, horn etc. and visiting the dens, caves. Since most mammals are secretive or

nocturnal, they are seldom seen by the casual observer. But their presence is often revealed by

tracks, burrows, nests, evidence of feeding and its residues, footprints, tail markings, fecal

material or scats. In addition to the field survey, discussions were conducted with the local

people.

Birds

Birds were recorded along six line transects measuring 500m–1 km, systematically selected.

All bird species seen or heard were recorded as present, irrespective of their distance from



transects. As the primary objective of the study was to record the species present in the area,

quantitative data, such as the number of individuals or the frequency of occurrence along each

transect, were not collected. Birds were identified using binoculars and a field guide (Redman

et al. 2011).

Butterflies

The transect method suggested by Ishii (1993) and Pollard (1977) were followed for the survey

and counted while walking along the selected transect route in the habitat.

Herpeto fauna (Reptiles and Amphibians)

The survey on the herpeto fauna was conducted at different micro-habitats during the day and

in the evening. GPS records were taken to outline the area covered during the field survey and

to show specific points where specimens were encountered. Photos were taken using digital

camera.

Equipment/Sources Used

➢ IUCN Red data Book (https://www.iucnredlist.org/)

➢ Canon Digital Camera EOS 760 D

➢ Binocular: Olympus 8-16 * 40 Zoom

➢ Handbook of Butterflies, Odonates, Reptiles, Vertebrates, Mammals etc.

Baseline data were collected for flora and fauna during the field visit and presented in the

report. Each plot selected randomly for sampling. The assessment was done in both greenbelt

barrier zone (7.5m wide) and mining area of the proposed mining area. The data is not

extrapolated to get the number of trees to be cut. Summary of the survey has given below.

Table 3-21 Plot wise details of Tree species

Botanical Name P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Hevea brasiliensis (Willd. ex Juss.) Muell.-Arg. 12 8 14 10 9 14

Strychnos nux-vomica L. 0 1 0 0 0 0

Alstonia scholaris (L.) R. Br. 1 0 0 1 2 1

Ficus exasperata Vahl. 0 0 1 0 0 0

Cassia fistula L. 0 1 0 0 0 0

Ficus hispida L.f. 0 0 0 0 1 0

Tectona grandis L.f. 0 1 0 2 0 0

Gliricidia sepium (Jacq.) Walp. 1 0 1 0 0 0

Terminalia paniculata Roth 2 1 0 0 1 0

Artocarpus hirsutus Lam. 0 0 0 0 0 1

Macaranga peltata (Roxb.) Müll.Arg. 2 4 2 3 2 2

Caryota urens L. 1 0 1 0 1 0

The biodiversity indices estimated for the purpose of understanding richness,

evenness and abundance of the flora are given below (Table 4).

https://www.iucnredlist.org/



Table 3-22 Biodiversity Indices estimated for the study area

SI No: Biodiversity Index Valu

e

1 Shannon- Weiner Index 1.231

2 Simpson Index 0.051

The Shannon- Weiner index calculated for the study is 1.231, evidently it is small value when

compared to other natural ecosystems such as Tropical wet evergreen forest (2.38 - 3.16), Moist

deciduous forest (2.15- 2.89), Dry deciduous forest (2.01- 2.45), Shola forest (2.75- 3.16) etc.

Similarly, in the case of Simpson index also, the value is 0.051 only. While we compare with

other tropical natural woody ecosystems, it is a very small value. The value of Simpson’s index

observed for various forest types are Tropical wet evergreen region (0.897- 0.912), Moist

deciduous forest (0.589- 0.868), Dry deciduous forest (0.675- 0.847) and Shola forests (0.879-

0.948). The values of indices indicated that the diversity, richness and dominance of floral

community in the study are very low on comparing with other natural woody ecosystems.

Bray Curtis Cluster analysis was also performed to grouping quadrates based on the similarity

of their plant composition. The dendrogram that illustrated the relationships between all the

samples based on a defined measure of similarity is given below.

Figure 3.22 Bray Curtis Cluster diagram to show the similarity of trees at different

sampling locations

The interpretation of dendrogram revealed that the Quadrates (Q) 1 and Q 4 (Clade 1), Q 6 and

10 (Clade 2), Q 2 and 9 (Clade 3), Q 5, 8 and 11 (Clade 4) showed high similarity in floral

community structure. The vertical analysis of the dendrogram revealed that the clades didn’t



have much similarity in the floral community structure. Especially the Clade 3 showed very

high difference in floral community structure than other Clades. Hence the dissimilarity value

of 0.75 revealed that the floral community structures among the quadrates are highly dissimilar.

The high dissimilarity among floral community further revealed high disturbance status of the

ecosystem and anthropogenic influence on changing floral community structure.

3.9.5 Floral Aspects

Table 3-23 List of Trees within the Core Zone

Sl.

No

.

Botanical

Name

Comm

on

Name

Family

Habitat Distributio

n

Numb

er

Status

1

Hevea

brasiliensi

s (Willd.

ex Juss.)

Muell.-Arg.

Rubbe

r

Euphorbiac

eae

Cultivated

Native of

Tropical

America

1750

Aprox

.

Exotic

2 Strychnos

nux-vomica

Kanjira

m

Loganiaceae Moist and

dry

deciduous

forests, also

in the

plains

Indo-

Malesia 1

3

Alstonia

scholaris

(L.) R. Br.

Ezhila

mpala

/Devil

Tree

Apocynacea

e

Moist

deciduous

forests and

sacred

groves, also

in the

plains

South and

South East

Asia to

Australia

5

4

Ficus

exasperata

Vahl.

Parakam

Moraceae

Moist

deciduous

forests, also

in the

plains

East Africa,

Arabia, India

and Sri Lanka

1

5

Cassia

fistula L.

Kanikko

nna

Caesalpiniac

eae

Found in

deciduous

forests from

plains to

1400m.

often

planted

along the

roadsides.

Indo- Malesia

1

Eruma

nakku/

Paraka

Moist

deciduous

and semi-

Indo- Malesia



6 Ficus

hispida L.f.

m/Tho

ndither

akam

Moraceae evergreen

forests, also

in the plains

to Australia 1

7

Tectona

grandis L.f.

Thekku

Verbenacea

e

Moist

deciduous

forests, also

raised in

plantations

South and

South East

Asia

3

Exotic

8

Gliricidia

sepium

(Jacq.)

Walp.

Seemak

onna

Leguminosa

e

Cultivated in

fields and

along fences

Native of

South

America;

introduced

and widely

grown in India

2

9

Terminalia

paniculata

Roth

Maruth

Combretace

ae

Moist and

dry

deciduous

forests, also

in the

plains

Peninsular

India

4

Ende mic to

Peninsular

India

10

Artocarpus

hirsutus

Lam.

Anjili

Moraceae

Semi-

evergreen

and moist

deciduous

forests, also

in the

plains

Southern

Western Ghats

1

Endemic

to

Southern

Western

Ghats

11

Macaranga

peltata

(Roxb.)

Müll.Arg.

Vatta

Euphorbiace

ae

Moist

deciduous

and

secondary

forests, also

in the

plains

India, Sri

Lanka and

Andamans

15

12

Caryota

urens L.

Choo

nda/C

hoon

dappa

na

Arecaceae

Evergreen

forests, also

in the plains

Indo-

Malaysia

3



Table 3-24 List of Saplings within the Core Zone

Sl.

N

o.

Botanical

Name

Common

Name

Family

Habitat Distributio

n

Status

1

Ficus

hispida L.f.

Erumanakku/

Parakam/

Thonditherakam

Moraceae

Moist

deciduous

and semi-

evergreen

forests,

also in the

plains

Indo-

Malesia to

Australia

2

Macaranga

peltata

(Roxb.)

Müll.Arg.

Vatta

Euphorbiaceae

Moist

deciduous

and

secondar y

forests,

also in the

plains

India, Sri

Lanka and

Andaman s

3

Xylia

xylocarpa

(Roxb.)Taub.

Irul

Mimosaceae

Moist

deciduous

forests,

also in the

plains

Indo- Malesia

4

Gliricidia

sepium (Jacq.)

Walp.

Seemakonna

Leguminosae

Cultivated

in fields

and along

fences

Native of

South

America;

introduce d

and widely

grown in

India

5

Tectona

grandis L.f.

Thekku

Verbenaceae

Moist

deciduous

forests,

also raised

in

plantation

South and

South East

Asia

6

Caryota urens

L.

Choonda/

Choondappana

Arecaceae

Evergree

n forests,

also in

the

plains

Indo-

Malaysia

7

Artocarpus

heterophyllus

Plavu

Moraceae

Evergreen

and semi-

evergreen

forests,

also

Widely

cultivated in

the tropics,

origin is

probably



Lam. widely

cultivated

South India

8

Alstonia

scholaris (L.)

R. Br.

Ezhilampala/Devil

Tree

Apocynaceae

Moist

deciduous

forests and

sacred

groves,

also in the

plains

South and

South East

Asia to

Australia

9

Olea dioica

Roxb.

Irippa

Oleaceae

Semi-

evergreen

and moist

deciduous

forests,

also in the

plains

India

10

Trema

orientalis (L.)

Bl.

Pottaama

Ulmaceae

Dry and

moist

deciduou

s forests,

also in

the plains

Tropical

Africa, Asia

and Australia

11

Terminalia

paniculata

Roth

Maruth

Combretaceae

Moist and

dry

deciduous

forests,

also in the

plains

Peninsular

India

Endemic to

Peninsular

India

12

Cassia fistula

L.

Kanikkonna

Caesalpiniaceae

Found in

deciduous

forests

from

plains to

1400m.

often

planted

along the

roadsides.

Indo- Malesia

13 Artocarpus

hirsutus Anjili Moraceae Semi-

evergreen

and moist

deciduous

forests,

also in the

plains

Southern

Western

Ghats

Endemic to

Southern

Western

Ghats

Evergreen

and semi-

evergreen

forests



14 Mangifera

indica L.

Mavu Anacardiaceae and also

widely

cultivated

Indo-

Malaysia

15

Terminalia

catappa L.

Badam

Combretaceae

Plains,

Cultivated

Malesia to

North

Australia

and

Polynesia,

commonly

planted in

the tropics

Table 3-25 List of Shrubs within the Core Zone

Sl.

No

.

Botanical

Name

Common

Name

Family

Habitat

Distributio

n

Status

1

Brineya

retusa

Aattacherukol

a,

Phyllanthacea

e

Dry

Evergreen to

Dry

Deciduous

Forests

Sri Lanka

to Indo-

China

2

Acacia

pennata (L.)

Willd

Karincha

Leguminosae Moist

deciduous

forest

Paleotropics

3

Grewia

nervosa

(Lour.)

Panigrahi.

Cherikkotta

Malvaceae

Semi-

evergreen

forests,

sacred

groves and

scrub

jungles

Tropical

Asia

4 Helicteres

isora

Edampiri-

Valampiri

Malvaceae Deciduous

forests,

also in

plantation

s and

plains

Indo-

Malesia,

China and

Australia

5

Chassalia

curviflora

(Wall.)

Thwaites

Rubiaceae

Degraded

forests

Indo-

Malesia

6

Lantana

camara L.

Kongini

Verbenaceae Most

aggressive

weed of

disturbed

ground

from

plains to

Native of

tropical

America,

Widely

naturalised

in

tropics

Exotic/Invasiv

e Species



the hills and

subtropics.

7 Mussaenda

frondosa

L.

Vellila Rubiaceae semi-

evergreen

forests,

also in

the plains

Peninsular

India

8

Clerodend

rum

infortunat

um L.

Perivelam

Verbenaceae

Degraded

forest areas

and also in

the plains

Indo-

Malesia

Exotic

9

Canthium

angustifolium

Roxb.

Kattakara

Rubiaceae

Moist

deciduous,

semi-

evergreen

and

evergreen

forests

India and

Myanmar

10

Chromolaen

a odorata

(L.)

R.M.King &

H.Rob.

Communist

-pacha

Composita e

A weed in

all

terrestrial

habitats

Native of

America;

naturalised

in Tropical

Asia

Exotic/

Invasive

Species

11

Urena

lobata L.

Uram

Malvaceae

Moist

deciduous

forests

and in the

plains

Pantropic

al

12 Ziziphus

oenoplia

Thudaly Rhamnaceae roadside

forests

and

thickets

13

Sida

rhombifoli

a L.

Kurunthotti

Malvaceae

Wastelan

ds, also in

degraded

forest

areas

Pantropic

al

14

Tabernaemont

ana alternifolia

L.

Kunnanpala

Apocynaceae

Along

margin of

the

evergreen

forests and

common

in moist

deciduous

forest, up

to 850 m.

Western

Ghats

Endemic to

the Western

Ghats

Dry and

moist



15 Hibiscus

hispidissimus

Griff.

Matthippuli Malvaceae deciduous

forests, also

in the

plains

Paleotropics

16

Ficus

heterophylla

Vallitheraka m

Moraceae

Deciduous

forests

along river

banks.

Indo-

Malesia

and

China

Table 3-26 List of Herbs within the Core Zone

Sl.

No.

Botanical

Name

Common

Name

Family

Habitat

Distributi

on

Status

1

Spermacoce

latifolia

Aubl.

Vellatharavu

/

Tharavu/Pac

hhapalla

Rubiaceae

Moist and dry

deciduous

forests and

waste places

Native of

Tropical

America;

now

established

in Tropical

Africa

and Asia

Exotic

2

Mimosa

pudica L.

Thottavadi

Leguminosae

Common on

moist and

ungrazed

places. Near

riverbanks,

bunds of

arable lands,

fallow lands

and water

courses.

Native of

South

America,

now

pantropic

al.

Exotic

3

Pennisetum

orientale

Rich.

Poaceae

Cultivated as

fodder grass,

often found

running wild

Central

Asia and

North

Africa

4

Stachytarph

eta

jamaicensis

(L.) Vahl

Verbenaceae

Dry and moist

deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Pantropical

5

Cleome

rutidosperm

a DC.

Neelavela

Cleomaceae

In coastal areas Pantropical

6

Ageratum

conyzoides

Appa

Compositae

Most abundant

weed of

disturbed ground

and fallows,

damp places and

Pantropical

Invasiv

e

Species



L. forest

undergrowth.

7

Peperomia

pellucida (L.)

Kunth.

Mashitandu

Chedi

Piperaceae

Degraded forest

areas and

wastelands

Native of

Tropical

America;

now

Pantropic

al

Exotic

8

Acmella

paniculata

(Wall. ex

DC.)

R.K.Jansen

Compositae

Frequently found

in boggy ground,

margins of

ponds, marshes,

along water

courses and in

rice

fields.

Indo-

Malesia,

America and

New Guinea

9

Naregamia

alata Wight &

Arn.

Nilanaragam

Meliaceae

Moist deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Peninsula r

India

10

Euphorbia

thymifolia L.

Chitrapala,

Nilappala

Euphorbiaceae

Riverbeds in

moist deciduous

forests, also in

plains

Tropical Asia

11

Desmodium

triflorum

Cherupalladi

Fabaceae

Grasslands and

moist deciduous

forests, also in

plains

Indo- Malesia

and Australia

12

Emilia

sonchifolia

(L.) DC.

Muyalchevian

compositae

Dry and moist

deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Tropical and

Subtropical

Africa and

Asia

Exotic

13

Scoparia

dulcis L.

Kallurukki

Plantaginaceae

Wasteplaces

Native of

Tropical

America;

now

Pantropical

Exotic

14

Vernonia

cinerea (L.)

Less. Puvankurunal

Compositae

Deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Pantropics Exotic

15

Axonopus

compressus

(Sw.)

P.Beauv.

Kaalappullu/

Carpet Grass

Poaceae

Dry and moist

deciduous

forests, waste

lands and

paddy fields

Tropics and

subtropics

16

Laportea

interrupta

Anachorian

Urticaceae

Degraded

deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Paleotropics



17

Synedrella

nodiflora (L.)

Gaertn.

Mudianpacha

Compositae

Deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Native of

West Indies;

naturalised in

India, China,

Malesia and

Polynesia

Invasive

Species

18

Phyllanthus

amarus

Schum. &

Thonn.

Keezharnelli/P

hyllanthus

Phyllanthaceae

Degraded moist

deciduous, forest

plantations and

also in plains

Tropics

Medicina

l

19

Tragia

involucrata Choriyanam Euphorbiaceae Wastelands

India and Sri

Lanka

20

Elephantopus

scaber L.

Aanachuvadi

Compositae

Moist deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Pantropical

21

Sida acuta

Burm.f.

Kurunthotti

Malvaceae

Dry and moist

deciduous

forests, also

in the plains

Pantropical

22

Pilea

microphylla

(L.) Liebm.

Gunpowder

Plant/Rock

weed

Urticaceae

Grown as garden

plant, often

found as an

escape

South

America;

now

introduced

into other

tropical

regions

Exotic

Table 3-27 List of Climbers within the Core Zone

Sl.

No

.

Botanical

Name

Common

Name

Family

Habitat

Distributi

on

Status

1

Calycopteris

floribunda

(Roxb.) Lam. ex

Poir.

Pullani

Combretaceae

Moist deciduous

forest, also in

the plains

Indo-

Malesia

2

Pueraria

phaseoloides

(Roxb.) Benth.

Thotta-payar

Leguminosae

Along margins

of cultivate

d lands

Tropical

Asia

Exotic

/

Invasi-

ve

species

Mikania

Common along

foothills, lower

slopes, scrub

jungles even in

poor soils, on

Tropical

and



3

micrantha

Kunth Vayara

Compositae

bare exposed

slopes.

subtropical

regions of

the world.

Invasiv

e

4

Cyclea peltata

(Lam.) Hook.

f. & Thoms.

Padathali

Menispermacea

e

Semi- evergreen

and evergreen

forests, also in

the plains

India and Sri

Lanka

5 Merremia vitifolia

(Burm. f.) Hallier f.

Manja kolambi

valli

Convolvulacea

e

Degraded forest

areas and also in

the plains

Indo- China

and China

Invasive

species

6

Pothos scandens L.

Paruvakodi

Araceae

Evergreen

forests, waste

places and sacred

groves

India to

Malesia and

Madagascar

7

Centrosema

pubescens

Benth.

Kattupayar/

Butterfly Pea Leguminosae

Cultivated

Native of

Tropical

America

Exotic

8

Dendrophthoe

falcata (L.f.)

Ettingsh.

Ittikkanni

Loranthaceae

Found in foothill

scrub jungles and

deciduous forests from plains to 1000m.

India, Sri

Lanka,

Thailand,

Indo- China

and Australia.

9

Ichnocarpus frutescens (L.) R.Br.

Palvalli

Apocynaceae

Moist and dry

deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Indo- Malesia and Australia

10

Smilax zeylanica

L.

Valiyakanni/Ar

ik anni

Smilacaceae

Moist deciduous

and semi-

evergreen

forests, also in

the plains

Indo- Malesia

11

Piper nigrum

L. var.nigrum

Kurumulaku

Piperaceae

Evergreen and

semi- evergreen

forests, also

cultivated

Peninsular

India and Sri

Lanka,

cultivated

elsewhere

12

Mukia maderaspata

na (L.) M.Roem.

Kasappuchedi

Cucurbitaceae

Deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Paleotropics

Semi-evergreen,

moist deciduous



13

Gloriosa superba

L.

Menthonni

Liliaceae

and dry

deciduous

forests, also in

the plains

Paleotropics

Table 3-28 List of Ferns

Sl.

No

.

Botanical Name

Common

Name

Family

Habitat

Distributi on

1

Adiantum latifolium

Lam.

Adiantaceae

Disturbed open

areas.

Native to

tropical

America

2

Selaginella

delicatula

Selaginellaceae

Terrestrial in shaded

areas Widely

cultivated

3

Pityrogramma

calomelanos (L.)

Link

Silver fern

Adiantaceae

Common on open

ground in fairly

exposed places

American

origin, now

widely

distributed in

pan-tropics

The vegetation of the study area was subdivided into 10×10 m plots for the analysis of tree

composition, with a subdivision of this area into 5 m ×5 m and 1m ×1 m for analysis of shrub

and herb composition randomly as per the standard methodology. Analysis of the flora revealed

that there are 71 plant species falling under 33 plant families. Angiosperms forms 68 species

with 18 species of trees including saplings, 16 species of shrubs, 22 species of herbs and 12

species of climbers. There are three Pteridophytes (ferns) falling under two families. The most

dominant plant family is Composite with 8 plant species followed by Malvaceae Leguminosae

and Moraceae. One tree species namely Terminalia paniculata identified from the proposed

project area is endemic to Peninsular India and one tree species namely Artocarpus hirsutus is

endemic to Southern Western Ghats. One species of Shrub namely Tabernaemontana

alternifolia is endemic to Western Ghats. The area devoid of any Rare Endangered and

Threatened (RET) species and the area have dominated with exotic tree species. The area did

not have any significant diversity of plants and can be used for mining purpose.

3.9.6 Faunal Aspects

The assessment carried out in the proposed area of 4.0262 Ha and 10 km surrounding area. The

inventory within the lease area yielded direct sighting of one species of mammal and indirect

sighting of three species within the area. The faunal species recorded here is based on the

direct/indirect sightings form the proposed study site.



Methodology

Birds, Butterflies, Dragon Flies: Line Transect & Point count method

Mammals: Line Transect method, Consultation with local people

Amphibians: Transect and Patch Sampling

Spiders: Searching and Direct Observations

Regarding the conservation status of the fauna, none of the animal species identified from the

site belonged to the threatened categories identified by the International Union for

Conservation of the Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN). Most of them are common and

widely distributed and the range of occurrence extended to wide geographical area. The

following lists of faunal elements were observed from the site:

Birds : 21 species

Mammals : 10 species

Butterflies : 25 species

Odonates : 9 species

Amphibians : 7 species

Reptiles : 12 species

Spiders : 16 species

Ants : 9 species

Table 3-29 List of Birds within the study Area

Sl.

No.

Scientific Name Common Name Family IUCN

Status

1 Centropus sinensis Greater coucal Cuculidae Least concern

2 Dendrocitta vagabunda Indian Treepie Corvidae Least Concern

3 Columba livia Blue Rock Pigeon Pteroclididae Least Concern

4 Corvus splendens House Crow Corvidae Least Concern

5 Acridotheres tristis Common Myna Sturnidae Least Concern

6 Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret Ardeidae Least Concern

7 Accipiter badius Shikra Accipitridae Least Concern

8 Nectarinia zeylonica Purple-rumped

Sunbird

Nectariniidae Least Concern

9 Dicrurus paradiseus Racket tailed drongo Dicruridae Least Concern

10 Dicrurus macrocercus Black Drongo Dicruridae Least Concern

11 Hierococcyx varius Common Hawk

Cuckoo

Cuculidae Least Concern

12 Saxicoloides fulicata Indian Robin Musciccapidae Least Concern



13 Loriculus vernalis Indian Hanging Parrot Psittacidae Least Concern

14 Pycnonotus jocosus Red Whiskered

Bulbul

Pycnonotidae Least Concern

15 Megalaima viridis White cheeked barbet Capitonidae Least Concern

16 Psittacula krameri Rose ringed parakeet Psittacidae Least Concern

17 Dicaeum agile Pale billed

Flowerpecker.

Dicaeidae Least Concern

18 Tyto alba Barn Owl Strigidae Least Concern

19 Copsychus saularis Oriental magpie robin Musciccapidae Least Concern

20 Turdoides striatus Jungle Babbler Musciccapidae Least Concern

21 Eudynamys scolopacea Asian Koel Cuculidae Least Concern

Table 3-30 List of Butterflies within the study Area

Sl.

No.

Common Name Scientific Name Status

Papilionidae

1 Common Mormon Papilio polytes Linnaeus

2 Southern Birdwing Troides minos Cramer Endemic to

W.Ghats

3 Blue Mormon Papilio polymnestor

4 Common Rose Pachliopta aristolochiae

Fabricius

5 Tailed Jay Graphium agamemnon Linnaeus

6 Common Bluebottle Graphium sarpedon Linnaeus

Pieridae

7 Common Jezebel Delias eucharis Drury

8 Common Emigrant. Catopsilia pomona Fabricius

9 Common Grass Yellow Eurema hecabe Linnaeus

Nymphalidae

10 Common Four-ring Ypthima huebneri Kirby

11 Nigger Orsotriaena medus Fabricius

12 Common Nawab Po1yura athamas

13 Common Crow Euploea core Stoll

14 Common Sailer Neptis hylas Linnaeus

15 Common Palmfly Elymnias hypermnestra

Linnaeus

16 Clipper Parthenos sylvia Cramer

17 Chocolate Pansy Junonia iphita Cramer

18 Blue Tiger Tirumala limniace Cramer

19 Lemon Pansy Junonia lemonias Linnaeus

Lycanidae

20 Common Cerulean Jamides ce1eno Cramer

21 Common Pierrot Castalius rosimon Fabricius



22 Lesser Grass Blue Zizina otis

Hesperidae

23 Straight Swift Parnara bada Moore

24 Grass Demon Udaspes folus Cramer

25 Pygmy Grass Hopper Aeromachus pygmaeus Fabricius

Table 3-31 List of Odonates within the study Area

Sl.

No. Scientific Name Common Name

IUCN Status

1 Pseudagrion microcephalum Blue Grass Dart Least Concern

2 Pantala flavescens Wandering Glider Least Concern

3 Diplacodes trivialis Ground Skimmer Least Concern

4 Urothemis signata Greater Crimson Glider Least Concern

5 Bradinopyga geminata Granite Ghost Least Concern

6 Rhyothemis vareiegata Common Picture Wing Least Concern

7 Ictinogomphus rapax Common Clubtail Least Concern

8 Acisoma panorpoides Asian Pintail Least Concern

9 Lathrecista asiatica Asiatic Bloodtail Least Concern

Table 3-32 List of Amphibians

Sl.

No.

Scientific Name Common Name IUCN Status

1 Duttaphrynus melanostictus Indian common toad Least Concern

2 Rhacophorus malabaricus Malabar gliding frog Least Concern

3 Raorchestes akroparallagi Variable Bush Frog Least Concern

4 Hoplobatrachus tigerinus Indian bullfrog Least Concern

5 Polypedates leucomystax Common Tree Frog Least Concern

6 Euphlyctis cyanophlyctis Indian skipper frog Least Concern

7 Pseudophilatus kani Kani Bush Frog Least Concern

Table 3-33 List of Reptiles within the study Area

Sl.

No. Scientific Name Common Name IUCN Status

1 Dendrelaphis tristis Common Indian Bronze-

back Least Concern



2 Hemidactylus frenatus Asian House Gecko Least Concern

3 Hemidactylus maculatus Spotted House Gecko Least Concern

4 Hemidactylus leschenaultii Bark Gecko Least Concern

5 Eutropis carinata Common Keeled Skink Least Concern

6 Calotes versicolor Oriental Garden Lizard Least Concern

7 Ahaetulla nasuta Common Vine Snake Not evaluated

8 Naja Asian cobra Least Concern

9 Vipera russelli Russell's viper Not evaluated

10 Lycodon aulicus Common Wolf Snake Not evaluated

11 Bungarus caeruleus Common krait Not evaluated

12 Ptyas mucosa Oriental Rat Snake Least Concern

Table 3-34 List of Mammals within the study Area

Sl.

No. Common Name Scientific Name IUCN Status

IW(P)A

(Schedule)

1 Three Striped Palm

Squirrel Funambulus palmarum

Least

Concern V

2 Greater Short-nosed

Fruit Bat Cynopterus sphinx

Least

Concern V

3 Pig Rat Bandicota indica Least

Concern V

4 Palm Civet/Toddy Cat Paradoxurus

hermaphroditus

Least

Concern II

5 Common Indian Field

Mouse

Mus booduga Least

Concern V

6 Common House Rat Rattus rattus Least

Concern V

7 House Mouse Mus musculus Least

Concern V

8 Black-Naped Hare Lepus

nigricollis

Least

Concern IV

9 Lesser Bandicoot Rat Bandico,ta

,bengalensis

Least

Concern V

10 Indian Flying Fox Pteropus

giganteus

Least

Concern V



Table 3-35 List of Millipedes and Centipedes

Sl. No. Scientific Name Common Name IUCN Status

1 Anoplodesmus saussurii

2 Scolopendra morsitans

3 Leptogoniulus sorornus

4 Trigoniulus corallinus Rusty millipede

Table 3-36 List of Ants

Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name

1 Giant Honey Ant Camponotus irritans

2 Weaver Ant Oecophylla smaragdina

3 Common Red Fire Ant Solenopsis geminata

4 Yellow Crazy Ant Anoplolepis gracilipes

5 Black Crazy Ant Paratrechina longicornis

6 Golden Backed Ant Camponotus sericeus

7 Greater Trap-Jaw Ant Ondontomachus haematodus

8 Miniscule House Ant Tetramorium smithi

9 Common Godzilla Ant Camponotus compressus

Table 3-37 List of Spiders

Sl. No. Family Species Name

1 Sparassidae Hetropoda venatoria

2 Hersilidae Hersilla savigngi

3 Araneidae Eriovixia laglaisei

4 Salticidae Plexippus paykulli

5 Oxyopidae Peucetia viridana

6 Theridiidae Theridula angula

7 Thomisidae Oxytate virens

8 Lycosidae Hippasa agelenoides

9 Pholcidae Crossopriza lyoni

10 Oxyopidae Oxyopes biramanicus

11 Araneidae Gasteragnatha germinate

12 Pisauridae Pardosa psedoannulata



13 Thomisidae Camaricus formosus

14 Araneidae Argiope pulchella

15 Salticidae Plexippus petersi

16 Araneidae Argiope anasuja

3.9.7 Green Belt Development

Greenbelt shall be developed along the boundary of stone quarry area with the native tree

species. The green belt plantation programme will be continued till the end of the mining

operation in the area. In framing out this activity on a sustainable and scientific base due

consultation and coordination with the forest department will be sought. Plants are chosen to

provide aesthetic, ecological and economical value. Trees will help to arrest propagation of

noise and help to lessen dust pollution due to dust arresting action.

Table 3-38 List of species recommended for greenbelt and afforestation

Sl.

No.

Trees

Sl. No

Trees

Scientific Name Common Name

Scientific Name Common Name

1 Briedelia retusa Mulluvenga 18 Pterocarpus marsupium Venga

2 Schleichera oleosa Puvam 19 Hopea parviflora Kambakam

3 Artocarpus hirsutus Anjili

20 Mimusops elengi Elenji

4 Wrightia tinctoria Nilapaala 21 Oleadioica Edana

5 Terminalia paniculata Maruth 22 Careyaarborea Pezhu

6 Xylia xylocarpa Irul 23 Grewia tiliifolia Unnam

7 Olea dioica Irippa 24 Polyalthia longifolia Aranamaram

8 Vitex altissima Karinochi 25 Tectona grandis Teak

9 Grewia tiliifolia Unnam 26 Wrightia tinctoria Danthapala

10 Dalbergia latifolia Eeti 27 Chrysophyllum roxburghii Pulichakka

11 Syzygium cumini Njaval 28 Psidium guajava Pera

12 Artocarpus

heterophyllus

Plavu 29 Alstonia scholaris Ezhilam Pala

13 Artocarpus hirsutus Anjili 30 Tamarindus indica Puli

14 Mangifera indica Mavu 31 Terminalia arjuna Neermaruthu



15 Ficus benghalensis Aal 32 Terminalia catappa Indian Almond

16 Ficus callosa Aal

17 Syzygium cumini Njaval

Table 3-39 List of shrubs recommends for Greenbelt

Sl.

No Scientific Name Common Name

1 Dendrocalamus strictus Mula

2 Bambusa bambos Mula

3 Helicteres isora Edampiri- Valampiri

4 Sida rhombifolia Kurunthotti

5 Pseudarthria viscida Muvvila

6 Justicia adhatoda Aadalodakam

7 Mussaenda frondosa Vellila

8 Capparis rheedii Chavruka

9 Ixora coccinea Thechi

3.10 Biodiversity Assessment in 10km Radius (Buffer Zone)

The Biodiversity Assessment (BA) provides detailed information about the flora and fauna

species in the projects implementing area, geographical importance, and threatening factors to

the ecosystem and communities. Identification of the species level of flora and fauna and

comparison of the same with the existing data and literatures provides an excellent management

plan for the sustainable development.

As per the request from the project proponent, we have conducted the Environmental Impact

Assessment (EIA) of the proposed region. This EIA aims to reveal the presence of flora and

fauna in the project implementation area along with the 10 km buffer zone and this lead to

assess the ecological impact of the area due to the proposed mining project. The proposed

project comes under the Survey Nos. 781/1/28–17-1, 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re Sy. No. 32) at

Athikkayam village, Ranni taluk, Pathanamthitta, Kerala, with quarry/mining area of 4.0262

Ha.

3.10.1 Objectives of the Analysis

The main objective of the biodiversity assessment in the proposed mining site is to;

• To perform detailed primary and secondary data collection on biodiversity in the core

and buffer zone (10 km) of project site.

• To identify flora and fauna that can be affected by mining activities through detailed

field study.



• To promote development that is sustainable and optimizes resources use as well as

management opportunities.

• To ensure environmental considerations are explicitly addressed and

incorporated into the development decision-making process.

• To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant

biophysical, social and other relevant effects of the above project proposal.

3.10.2 Methodology

Study Area

The area is physio-graphically a hilly terrain having rubber plantation. Different types of

ecosystem in the 10km boundary of the proposed project site include rubber plantation, forest

area, paddy fields, built up areas etc. Only the banks of Pampa river are included in the natural

zonation map of lightning and the village is not susceptible for the earth quake.

Figure 3.23 Google Earth Image showing the 10KM boundary of the proposed site Study

Period

The field study for the biodiversity assessment was performed during the period from May,

2020 to August 2020.

3.10.3 Floral Diversity Estimation

Sampling Strategy

Stratified random sampling with probability proportion to the size (PPS) was adopted for

analyzing vegetation composition of all the types encountered. The ultimate aim was to sample



nearly 0.01 per cent of the total area. However, keeping the time frame this seemed rather a

huge task. Therefore, the achieved sampling ranged from 0.001 percent to 0.0005 percent of

the total area. In view of the time and availability of other resources, optimum and

representative number of sample plots have been taken up covering all vegetation categories

and various topographic regions, in both core and buffer zones of quarry site.

In order to assure the representative sampling from various vegetation as well as topographic

regions, a Geoinformatics based land use/ land cover analysis and Topography analysis by

developing Digital Elevation Model (DEM) were performed prior to the field study. Help form

the local Biodiversity management Committee were also encountered to choose the study plots.

Quadrate method

Ten quadrates of 10m x 10m were laid down in each locality (Figure). The 10m x 10m quadrate

size was found to be representative in vegetation sampling of Western Ghats region of Kerala

(plot size was determined by species area curve method) (KFRI, 1997). Maximum care was

given to lay quadrates purely random and to assure representation of difference in elevation

and land cover categories of the locality.

At each sample plot all the tree species were identified and their number was counted. At each

sample point the circumference at breast height (CBH) of all tree species were also recorded.

The individuals with CBH> 30 cm are considered as tree and with > 17 cm and < 30 cm CBH

as saplings. From the same plot the shrubs species were also noticed. For herbaceous layer or

ground flora, the nested quadrate method with 1m × 1m plot size was taken in two opposite

corners.

Species Identification

Each plant was identified in the field itself (either botanical name or local name). Photo field

manuals of plant taxonomy were used for the identification of flora in the field itself (Easa,

2003; Sasidaran, 2004 & 2010). Photographs and specimens of unidentified plants were

collected with proper field notes (plot number, locality, habitat, flower color etc.) and the

expertise of experienced taxonomists was utilized to identify the same.

Marking Location of Sample Sites

Each sample site was located on Google Earth Imagery. Exact longitude and latitude and

location height (msl) were noted down using GPS. The quadrate location map of 10km buffer

zone of proposed quarry location is given below



Figure 3.24 Quadrate locations overlaid in Google Earth Image

3.10.4 Faunal Diversity Estimation

A qualitative assessment of faunal communities including vertebrate classes such as

Mammalia, Aves, Reptlia and Amphibians and non- vertebrate class of Insects (Butterflies and

Odonates) were also assessed though scientific sampling method. The species listed was

checked with IUCN Red Data book to understand their conservation strategy.

Continuous Sampling

Transects method was adopted for the qualitative assessment of faunal community in the study

area, where a sampling line is set up across areas where there are clear environmental

gradients. We selected locations to lay down a transect where a change of land use/ land cover

and elevations was observed.

Belt Transect Method

The belt transect was laydown by setting a line and numbered at 1m intervals, all the way along

its length. The position of the transect line was depends on the direction of the environmental

gradient of the study.

The species touching the line may be recorded along the whole length of the line (continuous

sampling) and also a width of 10 m was also observed in both sides of the transect line set in

the field. Hence an area of 100 x 10 m was observed at each habitat and elevation gradient in

the study area.



Marking of transects

Each transect locations was located on Google Earth Imagery. The path of the transect was

recorded using tracking option in the GPS. The transect location map of 10km buffer zone of

proposed quarry is given below.

Figure 3.25 Transect locations overlaid in Google Earth Image Sampling strategy for various

classes

Mammalia

The mammals were assessed by direct and indirect sighting. More preference was given to

indirect observation, such as foot print, burrows, skeleton, fecal materials, hairs, horn etc. and

also through the presence of dens and caves. Since most mammals are secretive or nocturnal,

they were seldom seen by the casual observer. But their presence was often revealed by tracks,

burrows, nests, evidence of feeding and its residues, foot prints, tail markings, fecal material

or scats. In addition to the field survey, discussions were conducted with the local people. The

indirect sightings of fauna were photographed and identified though the field guides (Nameer,

2015) and consultation with experts.

Aves (Birds)

Birds were also recorded along all the transects. All bird species were identified either through

direct sighted or by voices heard were recorded (irrespective of their distance from transects).

Birds were observed through binoculars and identified using field guide.



Herpeto fauna (Reptiles and Amphibians)

The survey on the herpeto fauna was also conducted at different micro-habitats during the day

and in the evening. GPS records were taken to outline the area covered during the field survey

and to show specific points where specimens were encountered. Photos were taken using digital

camera.

Insects (Butterflies and Odonates)

Insects especially butterflies and odonates were also recorded from various habitats through

transect method. The species of butterflies and odonates were identified through field guides.

Species sitings were recorded in the field and possibly photographed using digital camera.

3.10.5 Land Use and Land Cover Analysis

The analysis provided the basic landscape of the study area. Generally, mixed land use/land

cover visible in and around study area in which vegetation (35.02%) was dominates in the

present study followed by agricultural land (32.16%) covering 10 km surrounding the project

site. Other land use land cover identified in the study were fallow land (11.37%), barren land

(10.93%), open scrub/open area (5.83%), settlements (3.72%) and waterbody (0.97%). Due to

the proposed mining, there were no variations in the existing land use or land cover within the

study area. But within in proposed project site there may be some minor change in land use to

mining area. The forest covering about 14%of the area.

Figure 3.26 Land use/ land cover pattern of the 10km buffer zone of proposed granite

quarry site

/Forest Area Proposed Quarry



3.10.6 Floral Diversity

Identification of vegetation for the natural flora and crops was conducted through field surveys

and onsite observations. The plant species identification was done based on the reference

materials and also by examining the morphological characteristics and reproductive materials

i.e., flowers, fruits and seeds. The unidentified species were captured by camera. Land use

pattern in relation to agriculture crop varieties were identified through physical verification of

land.

Plot Description

A total of ten plots were used for the current rapid biodiversity assessment and out of which,

four included in near to the proposed project site and rest of the quadrates were from the

different part of the 10 km buffer zone around the proposed quarry site.

Table 3-40 Plot wise details of Tree species

Scientific name P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10

Albizia odoratissima 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

Albizia saman 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Alstonia scholaris 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

Anacardium occidentale 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Artocarpus hirsutus 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bauhinia purpurea 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Caryota urens 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Cassia fistula 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Cocos nucifera 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 1 0 0

Ficus benghalensis 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Ficus exasperata 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Ficus hispida 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Grewia tiliifolia 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Hevea braziliensis 8 10 0 10 6 8 12 8 14 14

Macaranga peltata 0 2 0 3 1 3 0 0 2 1

Manilkara zapota 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0

Nephelium lappaceum 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Olea dioica 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0

Polyalthia longifolia 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0

Pongamia pinnata 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0

Trema orientalis 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Schleichera oleosa 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0



Simarouba glauca 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

Strychnos nux-vomica 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Swietenia mahagoni 2 0 0 3 0 0 2 3 0 1

Tectona grandis 2 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 2

Terminalia paniculata 0 0 2 4 0 0 1 0 0 0

3.10.7 Trees, Shrubs and Herbs Observed

A total of 41 tree species are observed from the study period and included in tables below. The

shrubs, herbs and climbers observed from the quadrates studied are listed below.

Table 3-41 Checklist of trees

Sl.

No.

Scientific name

Common Name

Family

IUCN

status

1. Adenanthera pavonina Manchadai Fabaceae LC

2. Albizia odoratissima Vaka Fabaceae/leguminosae LC

3. Albizia saman Mazhamaram Fabaceae/leguminosae LC

4. Alstonia scholaris Ezhilamppala Apocynaceae LC

5. Anacardium occidentale Kasumavu Anacardiaceae LC

6. Annona reticulata Aatha Annonaceae LC

7. Artocarpus heterophyllus Jack fruit tree Moraceae LC

8. Artocarpus hirsutus Anjili Moraceae LC

9. Azadirachta indica Ariyaveppu Meliaceae LC

10.

Bauhinia purpurea

Chuvanna

mandaram

Fabaceae/leguminosae

LC

11. Caryota urens Aanapana Arecaceae/palmae LC

12.

Cassia fistula

Kanikkonna

Fabaceae

(caesalpinioideae)

LC

13. Cocos nucifera Coconut Palmae LC

14.

Erythrina stricta

Mullumurikk

Fabaceae

(Papilionoideae)

LC

15. Ficus benghalensis Peraal Moraceae LC

16. Ficus exasperata Therakam Moraceae LC

17. Ficus hispida Thondi Moraceae LC



18. Gliricidia sepium Cheema konna Fabaceae/leguminosae LC

19. Grewia tiliifolia Unnam Tiliaceae LC

20. Hevea braziliensis Rubber tree Euphorbiacaeae LC

21. Macaranga peltata Vatta Euphorbiaceae LC

22. Mangifera indica Mango Anacardiaceae LC

23. Manilkara zapota Chikku Sapotaceae LC

24. Melia azedarach Kattuveppu Meliaceae LC

25. Memecylon umbellatum Kayampoomaram Melastomataceae LC

26. Moringa sps. Muringa Moringaceae LC

27. Nephelium lappaceum Rambutan Sapindaceae LC

28. Olea dioica Irippa Oleaceae LC

29. Polyalthia longifolia Aranamaram Annonaceae LC

30.

Pongamia pinnata

Ungu

Fabaceae/

leguminosae

LC

31. Pterocarpus marsupium Karavenga Fabaceae LC

32. Trema orientalis Pottama Ulmaceae LC

33. Schleichera oleosa Poovam Sapindaceae LC

34. Simarouba glauca Lakshmitharu Simaroubaceae LC

35. Strychnos nux-vomica Kanjiram Loganiaceae LC

36. Swietenia mahagoni Mahogany Meliaceae LC

37. Tamarindus indica Puli Fabaceae LC

38. Tectona grandis Teak Lamiaceae LC

39. Terminalia catappa Badam Combretaceae LC

40. Terminalia paniculata Maruthu Combretaceae LC

41. Xylia xylocarpa Irul Fabaceae/leguminosae LC

Table 3-42 Checklist of Shrubs

Sl. No. Species Name Common Name Family

42. Abutilon indicum Ooram Malvaceae

43. Abutilon persicum Thutthi Malvaceae

44. Acacia farnesiana Sweet acacia Fabaceae



45. Acalypha hispida Poochavalan Euphorbiaceae

46. Acalypha wilkesiana Dragon plant Euphorbiaceae

47. Allamanda blanchetti Allamanda Apocynaceae

48. Allamanda cathartica Manjakolambi Apocynaceae

49. Alternanthera brasiliana Chumalacheera Amaranthaceae

50. Aniopteris evecta Giant fern Marattiaceae

51. Antidesma acidum Shirupuli Phyllanthaceae

52. Ardisia elliptica Kaaknjara Primulaceae

53. Asclepias curassavica Kammalchedi Apocynaceae

54. Bambusa bambos Bamboo Poaceae

55. Barleria cristata Neelakanakambaram Acanthaceae

56. Barleria grandiflora Vellakanakambaram Acanthaceae

57. Barleria lupulina Hophead Acanthaceae

58. Barleria prionitis Manjakanakambaram Acanthaceae

59. Bauhinia acuminata Vellamandharam Fabaceae

60. Breynia retusa Cup saucer plant Phyllanthaceae

61. Breynia vitis-idaea Chuvannaniruri Euphorbiaceae

62. Bridelia stipularis Euphorbiaceae

63. Brieddelia stipularis Cheruka Euphorbiaceae

64. Briedelia stipularis Kotta Euphorbiaceae

65. Brugmansia suaveolens Angel trumpet Solanaceae

66. Brunfelsia grandiflora Royal Purple Brunfelsia, Solanaceae

67. Callicarpa tomentosa Cherutheck Verbenaceae

68. Callicarpa tomentosa Kattuthekku Verbenaceae

69. Calotropis gigantea Erukku Asclepidaceae

70. Canthium angustifolium Kattakara Rubiaceae

71. Canthium rheedii Kara Rubiaceae

72. Capsicum frutescences Kantharimulaku Solanaceae

73. Capsicum frutescens Kanthari Solanaceae

74. Carissa carandas Karakka Apocynaceae

75. Cascabela thevetia Manjappoo Apocynaceae



76. Catharanthus roseus Shavakottapacha Apocynaceae

77. Chassalia curviflora Amalpori Rubiaceae

78. Chassalia curviflora Kattukkappi Rubiaceae

79.

Chassaliacurviflora var.

ohioxyloides

Karutha- amalppori

Rubiaceae

80. Chromolaena odorata Communist pacha Asteraceae

81. Clausena anisata Kattukariveppila Rutaceae

82. Clerodendron heterophyllum Tree of liitle statrs Lamiaceae

83. Clerodendron incisum Musical note Lamiaceae

84. Clerodendron infortunatum Peringalam Lamiaceae

85. Clerodendron thomsoniae Krishnakireedam Lamiaceae

86. Clerodendrum serratum Cheruthekke Verbenaceae

87. Clidemia hirta Kosters Curse Melastomataceae

88. Clinacanthus nutans Vishamooli Acanthaceae

89. Codiaeum variegatum Variegated laurel Euphorbiaceae

90. Coffea arabica Coffee Rubiaceae

91. Cordyline fruticosa Cabbage Tree Asparagaceae

92. Crossandra infundibuliformis Kanakambaram Acanthaceae

93. Crotalaria pallida Kilukkichedi Fabaceae

94. Crotalaria retusa Wedge leaf Rattlepod Fabaceae

95. Cuphea llavea Cuphea Lythraceae

96. Datura metel Ummam Solanaceae

97. Dendrophthoe falcata Ithilkkani Loranthaceae

98. Desmodium gangeticum Orila Fabaceae

99. Dracaena marginata Dragon Tree Asparagaceae

100. Dracaena reflexa Song of India Asparagaceae

101. Dracaena surculosa Spotted Dracaena Asparagaceae

102. Duranta erecta Goldspot Verbenaceae

103. Ehretia microphylla Kuranguvettila Boraginaceae

104. Embelia tsjeriam- cottam Cheriyannattam Myrsinaceae

105. Euphorbia cotinifolia Red spurge Euphorbiaceae



106. Euphorbia nivulia Ilakkalli Euphorbiaceae

107. Euphorbia pulcherima Poinsettia Euphorbiaceae

108. Euphorbia tithymaloides Thathammachedi Euphorbiaceae

109. Euphorbia X lomi Giant crown Euphorbiaceae

110. Excoecaria cochinchinensis Chinese croton Euphorbiaceae

111. Ficus hispida Parakam Moraceae

112. Ficushispida Therakam Moraceae

113. Flacourtia indica Karimulli Salicaceae

114.

Flemingia macrophylla

Korkkatachedi

Fabaceae

(Papilionoideae)

115. Flemingia strobilifera Kanala Fabaceae

116. Galphaimia gracilis Gold shower Malphighiaceae

117. Gardenia jasminioides Gandharajan Rubiaceae

118. Glycosmis pentaphylla Panal Rutaceae

119. Gomphia serrata Chavetti Ochnaceae

120. Gradenia gummifera Sugandharajan Rubiaceae

121. Graptophyllum pictum Graptophyllum Acanthaceae

122. Grewia hirsute chadachi Tiliaceae

123. Grewia nervosa Pottanga Tiliaceae

124. Grewia serrulata Pottanga Tiliaceae

125. Hamelia patens Pavizhamulla Rubiaceae

126. Helicteres isora Idampiri valampiri Malvaceae

127. Heterotis rotundifolia Pink lady Melastomataceae

128. Hibiscus hispidissimus Panchakam Malvaceae

129. Hibiscus rosa sinensis Chembarathi Malvaceae

130. Hibiscus schizopetalus Chembarathi Malvaceae

131. Hibiscus surattensis Panichakam Malvaceae

132. Holarrhena pubescens Kudakapala Apocynaceae

133. Holmskioldia sanguinea Chinese Hat Plant Lamiaceae

134. Hydrangea macrophylla Hydrangia Hydrangeaceae

135. Hyptis suaveolens Narippalla Lamiaceae



136. Ixora coccinea Chethi Rubiaceae

137. Ixora finlaysoniana Vellthechi Rubiaceae

138. Jatropha curcas Kadalavanak Euphorbiaceae

139. Justicia adhatoda Adalodakam Acanthaceae

140. Justicia candicans Justicia Acanthaceae

141. Justicia carnea Flamingo plant Acanthaceae

142. Justicia gendarussa Vathamkolli Acanthaceae

143. Justicia plumbaginifolia Vizhapacha Acanthaceae

144. Lantana camara Arippochedi Verbenaceae

145. Lantana montevidensis Arippoo Verbenaceae

146. Lawsonia inermis Milanchi Lythraceae

147. Leea indica Choriyamthali Vitaceae

148. Maesa indica Kireethi, Kattuvizhal Myrsinaceae

149. Malvaviscus arboreus Mulakuchembaruthi Malvaceae

150. Manihot esculenta Kappa Euphorbiaceae

151. Melastoma malabathricum Kalambatta Melastomataceae

152. Memecylon umbellatum Kashav Melastomataceae

153. Morus alba Mulberry Moraceae

154. Murraya koenigii Kariveppila Rutaceae

155. Mussaenda frondosa Vellila Rubiaceae

156. Naringi crenulata Nari narakam Rutaceae

157. Nerium oleander Arali Apocynaceae

158. Ochalandra travancorica Eera Poaceae

159. Ophiorrhiza eriantha Amalpori Rubiaceae

160. Osbeckia aspera Kattukadali Melastomataceae

161. Osbeckia octandra Cherukadali Melastomataceae

162. Pachystachys lutea Lolipop plant Acanthaceae

163. Pereskia aculeata Rose cactus Cactaceae

164. Pereskia bleo Rose cactus Cornaceae

165. Phoenix loureirii Chittanthal Arecaceae

166. Physalis minima Njottanjodiyan Phyllanthaceae



167. Piper longum Thippali Piperaceae

168. Pogostemon cablin Pacholi Lamiaceae

169. Polyscias fruticosa Snow flake Araliaceae

170. Premna serratifolia Munja Lamiaceae

171. Pseuderanthemum carruthersii Eranthemum Acanthaceae

172. Rauvolfia serpentina Amalpori Apocynaceae

173. Rhinacanthus nasutus Nagamulla

174. Ricinus communis Avanakk Euphorbiaceae

175. Rosa cymosa Rose Fabaceae

176. Rotheca serrata Cheruthekku Lamiaceae

177. Salvia coccinea Salvia Salviniaceae

178. Sauropus androgynus Velicheera Euphorbiaceae

179. Schaueria flavicoma Yellow Fuz Flower Acanthaceae

180. Schefflera arboricola Dwarf ubrella tree Araliaceae

181. Senna occidentalis Kattuthakara Fabaceae

182. Senna polyphylla Desert cassia Fabaceae

183. Senna tora Thakara Fabaceae

184. Sida cordifolia L. Kurunthotti Malvaceae

185. Sida rhombifolia Kurunthotti Malvaceae

186. Solanum anguivi Anachunda Solanaceae

187. Solanum rudepannum Putharichunda Solanaceae

188. Solanum torvum Chunda Solanaceae

189. Stachytarpheta cayennensis Narivalan Verbenaceae

190. Sterculia guttata Pottakkavalam Malvaceae

191. Strobilanthes ciliatus Kurunji Acanthaceae

192. Tabernaemontana alternifolia Palamaram Apocyaceae

193. Tabernaemontana divaricata Nanthyarvattam Apocynaceae

194. Thespesia lampas Kattuparathi Malvaceae

195. Thottea siliquosa Alpam Aristolochiaceae

196. Thuja occidentalis Thuja Cuppresaceae

197. Thunbergia erecta Kings Mantle Acanthaceae



198. Triumfetta rhomboidea Ottukayal Malvaceae

199. Urena lobata Oorppam Malvaceae

200. Vitex negundo Karinochi Verbenaceae

201. Wrightia tinctoria Dhantha pala Apocynaceae

202. Ziziphus mouritiana Ilantha Rhamnaceae

203. Ziziphus oenoplia Thodali Rhamnaceae

Table 3-43 Checklist of Herbs

Sl. No. Scientific Name Common Name Family

1. Acalypha indica Kuppameni Euphorbiaceae

2. Acampe praemorsa Maravazha Orchidaceae

3. Achyranthes aspera Kadaladi Amaranthaceae

4. Achyranthes bidentata Vankadaladi Amaranthaceae

5. Acmella paniculata Palluvedanachedi Asteraceae

6. Acrostichum heterophyllum Seethathali Pteridaceae

7. Acrotrema arnottianum Nilapunna Dilleniacea

8. Adiantum latifolium Adiantum Pteridaceae

9. Adiantum raddianum Adiantum Pteridaceae

10. Aerva lanata Cherula Amaranthaceae

11. Agave vivipara Dwarf Aloe Asparagaceae

12. Ageratum conyzoides Appa Asteraceae

13. Alocasia macrorrhizos Giant Taro Araceae

14. Alocasia X mortfontanensis Taro Araceae

15. Aloe vera Kattarvazha Xanthorrhoeace

16. Alpinia galanga Aratha Zingiberaceae

17. Alpinia malaccensis Alpinia Zingiberaceae

18. Alternanthera brasiliana Braziliyan joyweed Amaranthaceae

19. Alternanthera sessilis Kozhuppa Amaranthaceae

20. Alysicarpus vaginalis Nilaorila Fabaceae

21. Amaranthus cruentus Chuvannacheera Amaranthaceae

22. Amaranthus spinosus Mullancheera Amaranthaceae



23. Amarathus viridis Cheera Amaranthaceae

24. Amorphophallus campanulatus Kattuchena Araceae

25. Amorphophallus paeoniifolius Chena Araceae

26. Amorphophallus sps. Kattuchena Araceae

27. Ananas comosus Kathachakka Bromeliaceae

28. Anaphyllum wighti Araceae

29. Andrographis paniculata Kiriyath Acanthaceae

30. Anisomeles indica Chadayan Lamiaceae

31. Anthurium andraeanum Anthurium Araceae

32. Anthurium crystallinum Anthurium Araceae

33. Anthurium radicans Anthurium Araceae

34. Asystasia gangetica Creeping Foxyglove Acanthaceae

35. Axonopus compressus Buffalo grass Poaceae

36. Bergonia coccinea Kayyalapuli Begoniaceae

37. Bidens pilosa Cobblers Pegs Asteraceae

38. Bigonia magnifica Bigonia Begoniaceae

39. Biophytum sensitivum Mukkutti Oxalidaceae

40. Blechnum orientale Centipede Fern Blechnaceae

41. Blepharis maderaspatensis Blepharis Acanthaceae

42. Boerhavia repens Thazhuthama Nyctaginaceae

43. Brassica juncea Kaduk Brassicaceae

44. Bryophyllum pinnatum Ilamulachi Crassulaceae

45. Buddleja indica Buddleja Scrophulariaceae

46. Bulbophyllum sterile Mukkittakaya Orchidaceae

47. Caesalpinia mimosoides Kooramullu Fabaceae

48. Caladium bicolor Angel wings Araceae

49. Calathea rufibarba Calathea Marantaceae

50. Callisia repens Creeping Inchplant Commelinaceae

51. Canna indiaca Kanavazha Cannaceae

52. Canthium angustifolium Karamullu

53. Canthium coromandelicum Kattakkara



54. Capsicum annuam Capsicum Solanaceae

55. Celosia argentea Plumed Cockscomb Amaranthaceae

56. Centella asiatica Kudangal Apiaceae

57. Centratherum punctatum Centratherum Asteraceae

58. Chlorophytum comosum Spider Plant Asparagaceae

59. Chrysothemis pulchella Chrysothemis Gesneriaceae

60. Cleome burmannii Kattukaduk Capparaceae

61. Cleome rutidosperma Kattukaduku Cleomaceae

62. Cleome viscosa Kattukaduku Cleomaceae

63. Coix lacryma jobi Poochakka Poaceae

64. Colocasia esculenata Chembu Araceae

65. Commelina benghalensis Benghal day flower Commelinaceae

66. Commelina diffusa Climbing day flower Commelinaceae

67. Cosmos sulphureus Yellow cosmos Asteraceae

68. Costus speciosus Channakkoova Costaceae

69. Crassocephalum crepidioides Appuppanthadi

70. Curculigo orchiodies Nilappana Hypoxidaceae

71. Curcuma aromatica Kasthurimanjal Zingiberaceae

72. Curcuma longa Manjal Zingiberaceae

73. Curcuma pseudomontana Kattumanjal Zingiberaceae

74. Cyanotis axillaris Spreading Dayflower Commelinaceae

75. Cyanotis cristata Nabhali Commelinaceae

76. Cyanthillium cinereum Cyanthillium Asteraceae

77. Cyathula prostrata Cherukadaladi Amaranthaceae

78. Cymbidium aloifolium Cymbidium Orchidaceae

79. Cymbopogon citratus Vaatupullu Poaceae

80. Cymbopogon flexuosus Mechilpullu Poaceae

81. Cynodon dactylon Karuka Poaceae

82. Cyperus haspan Haspan Cyperaceae

83. Dactyloctenium aegyptium Crowfoot grass Poaceae

84. Davallia fejeensis Rabbit Foot Fern Polypodiaceae



85. Dendrobium aphyllum Dendrobium Orchidaceae

86. Desmodium triflorum Nilamparanda Fabaceae

87. Dicranopteris linearis Froken Fern Gleichenaceae

88. Diplazium esculentum Churali Athyriaceae

89. Drosera peltata Azhukanni Droseraceae

90. Drynaria quercifolia Oak leaf fern Polypodiaceae

91. Eclipta prostrata Kayyoni Asteraceae

92. Eichhornia crassipes Water Hyacinth Pontederiaceae

93. Elephantopus scaber Anachuvadi Asteraceae

94. Eleusine indica Goose grass Poaceae

95. Eleutheranthera ruderalis Venappacha Asteraceae

96. Embelia ribes Vizhal Myrsinaceae

97. Emilia sonachifolia Muyalchevian Asteraceae

98. Ensete superbum Malavazha Musaceae

99. Epidendrum radicans Holy cross Orchidaceae

100. Epiphyllum oxypetalum Nishagandhi Cactaceae

101. Equisetum giganteum Horsetail Equisetaceae

102. Eragrostis unioloides Chinese love grass Poaceae

103. Euphorbia heterophylla Painted euphorbia Euphorbiaceae

104. Euphorbia hirta Nilappana Euphorbiaceae

105. Euphorbia thymifolia Nilappala Euphorbiaceae

106. Evolvulas alsinoides Vishunukranthi Convolvulaceae

107. Evolvulas nummularius Bindweed Convolvulaceae

108. Geophila repens Karimunjil Rubiaceae

109. Gomprena globosa Vadamalli Amaranthaceae

110. Hedychium coronarium Kalyanasougandhikam Zingiberaceae

111. Heliconia aurantiaca Aurantic Heliconia Heloconiaceae

112. Heliconia latispatha Lobsterclaw Heloconiaceae

113. Heliotropium indicum Thekkada Boraginaceae

114. Hemigraphis alternata Murikoodi Acanthaceae

115. Hemionitis arifolia Heart fern Pteridaceae



116. Hybanthus enneaspermus Orithalthamara Violaceae

117. Hydrocotyle· javanica Vella vaite Apiaceae

118. Hydrocotyle· sibthorpioides Kudangal Apiaceae

119. Hyptis capitata Knob weed Lamiaceae

120. Hyptis suaveolens Mint weed Lamiaceae

121. Impatiens balsamina Bolsam Balsaminaceae

122. Imperata cylindrica Darbha

Table 3-44 Checklist of Climbers

Sl.

No.

Scientific Name

Common Name

Family

1. Abrus precatorius Kunni Fabaceae

2. Acacia caesia Incha Fabaceae

3. Acacia pennata Karincha Fabaceae

4. Acacia sinuata Shikkakai Fabaceae

5. Acacia torta Karincha Fabaceae

6. Ampelocissus latifolia Karantavalli Vitaceae

7. Anamarita coculus Pollakkaya Menispermaceae

8. Antigonon leptopus Mexican creeper Polygonaceae

9. Argyeria osyrensis Silverweed Convolvulaceae

10. Argyreia nervosa Samudrapacha Convolvulaceae

11. Aristolochia indica Garudakkodi Aristolochiaceae

12. Asparagus racemosus Shathawari Asparagaceae

13. Asparagus setaceus Asparagus Fern Asparagaceae

14. Bougainvillea glabra Bouganvilla Nyctaginaceae

15. Calamus rotang Chooral Araceae

16. Calopogonium mucunoides Kattupayar Fabaceae

17. Calycopteris floribunda Pullanji Combretaceae

18. Canavalia gladiata Kathipayar Fabaceae

19. Cardiospermum halicacabum Vallizhuninja Sapindaceae

20. Cayratia japonica Chunnambuvalli Vitaceae



21. Centro semamolle Kattupayar Fabaceae

22. Centrosema molle Payar Fabaceae

23. Centrosema pubescens Kattupayar Fabaceae

24. Chonemorpha fragrans Appuppanthadi Apocynaceae

25. Cissus javana Njerinjampuli Vitaceae

26. Cissus latifolia Chunnambuvalli Vitaceae

27. Cissus quadrangularis Changalamperenda Vitaceae

28. Clerodendrum paniculatum Bleeding heart Lamiaceae

29. Clitoria ternatea Shankhupushpam Fabaceae

30. Coccinia grandis Koval Cucurbitaceae

31. Combretum indicum Thookkuchedi Combretaceae

32. Cucumis sativus Vellari Cucurbitaceae

33. Cuscuta reflexa Moodillathali Convolvulaceae

34. Cyclea peltata Padathalil Menispermaceae

35. Derris trifoliata Ponnamvalli Fabaceae

36. Dioscorea alata Kachil Dioscoreaceae

37. Dioscorea bulbifera Kaatukachil Dioscoreaceae

38. Dioscorea hispida Podavakikizhangu Dioscoreaceae

39. Dioscorea oppositifolia Kattukachil Dioscoreaceae

40. Dioscorea wallichii Kattukizhangu Dioscoreaceae

41. Dipolocyclos palmatus Neyyunni Cucurbtaceae

42. Dolichos trilobus Kattumuthira Fabaceae

43. Dregea volubilis Vattakakkakodi Apocynaceae

44. Entada rheedei Parandavalli Fabaceae

45. Epipremnum aureum Golden Pathos Araceae

46. Epipremnum pinnatum Centipede Tongavine Araceae

47. Ficus pumila Creeping fig Moraceae

48. Gloriosa superba Menthonni Colchicaceae

49. Gnetum latifolium Karuthodal Gnetaceae

50. Hemidesmus indicus Naruneendi Apocynaceae

51. Hibiscus hispidissimus Panichikam Malvaceae



52. Ichnocarpus frutescens Palvalli Apocynaceae

53. Ipomea hederifolia Scarlet creeper Convolvulaceae

55. Ipomea quamoclit Cypress vine Convolvulaceae

56. Ipomoea deccana Ipomea Convolvulaceae

57. Jacquemontia penta Skyblue Convolvulaceae

58. Jasminum malabaricum Kadambuvalli Convolvulaceae

59. Jasminum sambac Mulla Oleaceae

60. Lygodium flexuosum Climbing fern Schizaeaceae

61. Marsdenia sylvestris Chakkarakkoli Apocynaceae

62. Merremia tridentata Cheruvayara Convolvulaceae

63. Merremia vitifolia Manjakolambi Convolvulaceae

64. Mikania micrantha Dhridharashtrappacha Asteraceae

65. Mimosa diplotricha Anathottawadi Fabaceae

66. Momordica charantia Paval Cucurbitaceae

67. Mucuna pruriens Naykkurana Fabaceae

68. Mukia maderaspatana Mukkaapeeram Cucurbitaceae

69. Myxopyrum smilacifolium Chathyramulla Oleaceae

70. Naravelia zeylanica Vathamkolli Ranunculaceae

71. Passiflora edulis Passoin fruit Passifloraceae

72. Passiflora foetida Chadayan Passifloraceae

73. Petrees volubilis Sandpaper Vine Verbenaceae

74. Piper mullesua Kattukurumulaku Piperaceae

75. Piper nigrum Kurumulaku Piperaceae

76. Pothos scandens Parvazhu Araceae

77. Pueraria phaseoloides Kattupayar Fabaceae

78. Pueraria phaseoloides Thottappayar Fabaceae

79. Quisqualis indica Thookuchethi Combretaceae

80. Smilax zeylanica Kareelanchi Smilacaceae

81. Thunbergia alata Black eyed susan vine Acanthaceae

82. Thunbergia laurifolia Thunbergia Acanthaceae

83. Tiliacora acuminata Vallikkanjiram Menispermaceae



84. Tinospora cordifolia Amruth Menispermaceae

85. Toxocarpus kleinii Toxocarpus Asclepidaceae

86. Vignaum bellata Kattupayar Fabaceae

87. Wattakaka volubilis Vattakkakottai Apocynaceae

88. Xenostegiatridentata Prasarani Convolvulaceae

89. Ziziphus oenopolia Cheruthudali Fabaceae

3.10.8 Faunal Diversity

The faunal elements were identified by direct sightings or indirect evidences. The direct and

indirect sightings of the various faunal classes were reported from belt transects set in the field.

The species were mostly identified from the field itself using photo field guides and the status

of each species was determined and wildlife schedule category was ascertained as per the

IUCN-Red Data Book and Indian wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.

Mammals

The list of mammals observed in the transects and possible species around the site are listed

(Table 3-45), a total 6 species were identified. Mammals traced from the site are common.

There was no threatened species identified.

Table 3-45 Checklist of mammals


1. Rattus Common House Rat LC

2. Funambulus tristriatus Jungle palm Squirrel LC

3. Canis aureus Indian Jackal LC

4. Pteropus giganteus Indian Flying Fox LC

5. Herpestes edwardsii Indian Grey Mongoose LC

Birds

A total of 44 species of birds were identified by direct observations and voice-calls from the

study area. Also the expert opinion was sought to list the number of birds probably occurred in

the area (Table 3-46). There was no threatened species identified from the proposed site as per

the IUCN status.

Table 3-46 Checklist of Birds

Sl

No.

Scientific Name Common name IUCN Status

1. Eudynamys scolopaceus Asian Koel LC



2. Cypsiurus balasiensis Asian Palm-Swift LC

3. Artamus fuscus Ashy Wood swallow

4. Hirundo rustica Barn Swallow LC

5. Dicrurus macrocercus Black drongo LC

6. Oriolus xanthornus Black hooded Oriole LC

7. Dinopium benghalense Black-rumped Flameback LC

8. Columba livia Blue Rock Pigeon LC

9. Acrocephalus dumetorum Blyth‟s Reed Warbler LC

10. Haliastur indus Brahminy Kite LC

11. Parus cinereus Cinereous Tit LC

12. Aegithina tiphia Common Iora LC

13. Alcedo atthis Small Blue Kingfisher LC

14. Acridotheres tristis Common Myna LC

15. Hierococcyx varius Common Hawk-Cuckoo LC

16. Orthotomus sutorius Common Tailorbird LC

17. Centropus sinensis Greater Coucal LC

18. Dicrurus paradiseus Greater Racket-tailed

Drongo

LC

19. Merops orientalis Green Bee-eater LC

20. Gallus sonneratii Grey Junglefowl LC

21. Prinia hodgsonii Grey-breasted Prinia LC

22. Corvus splendens House Crow LC

23. Ardeola grayii Indian Pond-Heron LC

24. Aerodramus unicolor Indian Swiftlet LC

25. Argya striata Jungle Babbler LC

26. Acridotheres fuscus Jungle Myna LC

27. Glaucidium radiatum Jungle Owlet LC

28. Corvus macrorhynchos Large-billed crow LC

29. Apus affinis Little Swift LC

30. Cinnyris lotenius Loten‟s Sunbird LC

31. Sturnia blythi Malabar Starling LC



32. Dicaeum concolor Nilgiri Flowerpecker LC

33. Copsychus saularis Oriental magpie robin LC

34. Zosterops palpebrosus Oriental white eye LC

35. Dicaeum agile Pale billed Flowerpecker. LC

36. Leptocoma zeylonica Purple-rumped Sunbird LC

37. Pycnonotus cafer Red-vented Bulbul LC

38. Pycnonotus jocosus Red whiskered bulbul LC

39. Psittacula krameri Rose ringed parakeet LC

40. Dendrocitta vagabunda Rufous tree pie LC

41. Streptopelia chinensis Spotted Dove LC

42. Megalaima viridis White-cheeked Barbet LC

43. Halcyon smyrnensis White-throated Kingfisher LC

44. Lonchura striata White-rumped Munia LC

Reptiles

9 reptiles were identified from the field (Table 3-47) and all the identified species were listed

under least concerned category also.

Table 3-47 Checklist of Reptiles


1. Naja Asian cobra LC

2. Calotes versicolor Common Garden Lizard LC

3. Varanus bengalensis Common Indian monitor LC

4. Bungarus caeruleus Common krait Not evaluated

5. Lycodon aulicus Common Wolf Snake Not evaluated

6. Mabuya carinata Keeled Grass Skink LC

7. Ptyas mucosa Oriental Rat Snake LC

8. Ptyas mucosus Rat snake LC

9. Vipera russelli Russell's viper Not evaluated

Amphibians

2 amphibian species were identified from the field (Table 3-48) and none of the identified

species were in the risky category also.



Table 3-48 Checklist of Amphibians


1. Duttaphrynus melanostictus Asian Common Toad LC

2. Hoplobatrachus tigerinus Indian bullfrog LC

Butterflies

Among invertebrate, Butterflies were the most dominant category identified from the field

(Table 3-49). A total of 32 species were identified from the field and all the species were in the

least concerned category.

Table 3-49 Checklist of butterflies

Sl. No: Scientific Name Common Name IUCN Status

1. Acraea terpsicore Tawny Coaster LC

2. Ariadne Angled Castor LC

3. Captopsilia pomona Common emigrant LC

4. Castalius rosimon Common Pierrot LC

5. Catopsilia pyranthe Mottled Emigrant LC

6. Ypthima baldus Common Five ring LC

7. Udaspes folus Grass Demon LC

8. Ampittiadios corides Bush Hopper LC

9. Coladenia indrani Tricoloured Pied Flat LC

10. Danaus genutia Common Tiger LC

11. Danaus chrysippus Plain Tiger LC

12. Elymnias hypermnestra Common Palmfly LC

13. Euploe core Common Indian Crow LC

14. Eurema hecabe Common Grass Yellow LC

15. Graphium doson Common Jay LC

16. Hesperiidae Sp Skipper LC

17. Hypolimnas misippus Danaid eggfly LC

18. Jamides celeno Common cerulean LC

19. Junonia iphita Chocolate Pansy LC

20. Junonia lemonias Lemon Pansy LC



21. Leptosia nina Psyche LC

22. Melanitis leda Common Evening Brown LC

23. Mycalesis perseus Common Bushbrown LC

24. Micronia aculeata Asian Spotted Swallow Tail LC

25. Neptis hylas Common Sailor LC

26. Orsotriaena medus Nigger LC

27. Pachliopta aristolochiae Common Rose LC

28. Papilio helenus Red Helen LC

29. Papilio polymnestor Blue Mormon LC

30. Papilio polytes Common Mormon LC

31. Tirumala limniace Blue Tiger LC

32. Ypthima huebneri Common Four-ring LC

Odonates

A total of 8 species odonates were also identified from the field (Table 3-50) and all the species

were in the least concerned category.

Table 3-50 Checklist of Odonates

Sl. No. Scientific name Common Name IUCN Status

1. Orthetrum glaucum Blue Marsh Hawk LC

2. Rhyothemis vareiegata Common Picture Wing LC

3. Ictinogomphus rapax Common Clubtail LC

4. Pseudagrion microcephalum Blue Grass Dartlet LC

5. Neurothemis fulvia Fulvous Forest Skimmer LC

6. Bradinopyga geminata Granite Ghost LC

7. Ceriagrion cerinorubellum Orange-tailed Marsh Dart LC

8. Neurothemis tullia Pied Paddy Skimmer LC

Insects

A total of 7 insects were identified from the study area and listed in Table 3-51.



Table 3-51 List of Insects

Sl. No. Scientific name Common Name

1. Camponotus sp Carpenter ant

2. Oecophylla smaragdina Weaver ant

3. Oxytate virens Grass crab spiders

4. Nephila maculata Giant golden orb weaver

5. Ondontomachus haematodus Greater Trap-Jaw Ant

6. Polyarchis halidayi Arched Two-spined Ant

7. Crossopriza lyoni Tailed cellar spiders

3.10.9 Anticipated Environment Impact and Mitigation Measures

The quarrying operations cause environmental problems such as degradation of land,

deteriorating air, water and soil quality, affecting the biological and socio- economic setting of

the area. If adequate control measures are not taken to prevent/mitigate the adverse

environmental impacts, these operations may cause irreversible damage to the eco-system. The

environmental parameters most commonly affected by quarrying activities are

➢ Air quality

➢ Water quality

➢ Noise levels and ground vibrations

➢ Land Use pattern

➢ Biological environment

➢ Occupational Health Due to Project Operations

➢ Socio-Economic conditions

Impacts on Land Use Pattern

The mine is located in an area of 4.0260 ha. The quarrying lease area is not a part of any type

of forest. Lease area is barren and far away from agricultural lands, hence all the impact on

land use is positive because of afforestation activities will be carried out by mine proponent.

Due to opencast quarrying activities, the landscape may not change. There may not be much

effect on the aesthetic environment of the lease area due to mining. There will be minimal

impact on land use of the 10 km buffer area of the proposed project activity.

The aesthetic beauty can be developed by proper reclamation activities. Since this is an

opencast mining proposal, the land use on surface will not be affected in any way.



Impacts on Biological Environment

Flora and Fauna

The proposed site is having minimal vegetation diversity. Even though, topsoil will be removed

for the quarrying activity and the vegetation will be cleared. It is also observed that the floral

and faunal species found in the study area are commonly found species. Forests and Rubber

Plantation of Rubber Research Institute, Harrison Estate and Laha Estates are the major

plantation areas are the major portion of land use in the 10km buffer area. No rare, endemic &

endangered species are reported from the area. The mining activity will not affect the wildlife

as the forests are away from the proposed project site.

Wildlife

There is no National Park, Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, Tiger/Elephant Reserve,

Wildlife corridor etc. within 10 km radius of the project site. Therefore, mining will not cause

problem to the existing wildlife.

However, during mining activities the mine management will practice scientific method of

mining with proper Environmental Management Plan including pollution control measures

especially for air and noise, which will not cause any adverse impact on the surrounding

wildlife. The following impacts are identified on the biological environment due to the

proposed mining activities.

The proposed quarrying activity will not come under forest area. Hence, there will not be any

adverse impact on the biological environment.

Proposed Biological Environment Protection Measures

A detailed study on ecology and wildlife of the core zone and buffer zone of the proposed

quarry was carried out and a detailed plan was prepared to minimize the impacts of the

quarrying on ecology and wildlife of the area.

Flora and Fauna

Activities of Mine development and operations & transportation to end users will cause the

impact of displacement of existing fauna and loss of vegetation. The proposed area is vegetated

with thicket and rubber cultivation.

The buffer area of the proposed mining area can be utilized for green belt development. This

will enrich the floral and faunal diversity in the future. The Environment Management Plan

will design thus to develop to accommodate and flourish the faunal diversity.

3.10.10 Summary

The biodiversity assessment done for the Quarrying and Mining Activity proposed at

Athikkayam has shown that the proposed quarry projects will have only minimal impact on the

10km buffer area. The location where quarrying activities are proposed is having a working

quarry and an abandoned quarry around the proposed site. There are few quarries working in

the 10km buffer area. No occupational accidents / hazards were reported from the site or from

the surrounding quarries.



3.11 Demography and Socio-Economics

Socio-economic environment, an essential part of environmental study incorporating various

facts related to socio-economic conditions in the study area, which deals with the total

environment. Socioeconomic survey tools are designed to collect information as a means of

understanding of local resource management systems, resource use and the relative importance

of resources for households and villages. Survey also provides information on interaction with

the government decision-making systems and community perceptions of trends and priority

issues.

Knowledge about community-based institutions, which is also obtained, and their roles in the

sustainable use and conservation of natural resources, helps to facilitate or reinforce a

consensus on land tenure and rights for the region, now and in the future.

Socio economic study includes demographic structure of the area, provision of basic amenities

viz., housing, education, health and medical services, occupation, water supply, sanitation,

communication, transportation, prevailing diseases pattern as well as features of aesthetic

significance such as temples, historical monuments, etc. at the baseline level. This would help

in visualizing and predicting the possible impact depending upon the nature and magnitude of

the project. The project proponent is committed to take up the socio-economic development

initiatives not only to minimize the negative impact on the population and also improve the

socio-economic status of population living in 10 km radius of the plant as its sustained effort

as part of Corporate Environmental Responsibility-CER.

3.11.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes primary survey, review of published

secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks- 2011 and Primary Census Abstract of

Census-2011) with respect to population, density, household size, sex ratio, Child sex ratio,

social stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure, for the village and 10 km radius

study area.

3.11.2 Objectives of study

The objectives of this socio-economic report consist of:

• To conduct socio-economic assessment study in Project Area.

• To understand the current socio-economic situation in the region to cover the sub

sectors of education, health, sanitation, and water and food security.

• To recommend practical strategic interventions in the sector.

• To assist in providing suggestions for better living standards.

• To get an idea on possible employment opportunities in the area.

•

3.11.3 Scope of study

• To study the Socio-economic status of the project affected villages.

• Prediction of possible project impact on the communities



• The outcome of the socio-economic survey will make it easy to frame the mitigation

measures in the area.

3.11.4 Demography

• Distribution of Population of four Villages within the study area

• There are no habitations within the lease area/site.

As per 2011 census the distribution of population in the area is shown in Table 3-52 and Table

3-53.

Table 3-52 Distribution of Population within the Study Area

Particulars Within the site Within 10km radius from the lease

Population - 67092

Villages - 4

No of Households - 17552

Table 3-53 Demography of Four Villages within the 10km Study area

Sl.

No

Details

Number/Area

Athikkaya

m Village

Chethackal

Village

Kollamula

Village

Pazhavang

adi

Village

1 Area 2156 4793 7112 2646

2 Number of Households 2477 3982 5724 5369

3

Total population

(including institutional

and houseless population)

Persons 9548 15027 22449 20068

Males 4645 7209 10932 9618

Females 4903 7818 11517 10450

4 Total population of

children age 0-6years

Total 851 1314 2135 1770

Boys 431 647 1083 913

girls 420 667 1052 857

5 Scheduled Castes

population

Persons 575 1566 1601 1618

Males 287 770 774 799

Females 288 796 827 819

6 Scheduled Tribes

population

Persons 275 287 1262 996

Males 147 138 622 450

Females 128 149 640 546

7 Literates Persons 8482 13276 19718 17650

Males 4135 6398 9626 8435



Sl.

No

Details

Number/Area

Athikkaya

m Village

Chethackal

Village

Kollamula

Village

Pazhavang

adi

Village

Females 4347 6878 10092 9215

8 Total workers

Persons 3268 5132 7464 6543

Males 2568 3803 5889 4893

Females 700 1329 1575 1645

9 Main workers

Persons 2635 3639 6015 5180

Males 2205 2987 4985 4151

Females 430 652 1030 1029

10

Industrial

category of

main

workers

Cultivators

Persons 447 346 1658 388

Males 423 335 1450 362

Females 24 11 208 26

Agricultural

labourers

Persons 330 434 838 650

Males 310 378 747 574

Females 20 56 91 76

Household

industry

workers

Persons 124 84 180 119

Males 104 73 121 95

Females 20 11 59 24

Other

workers

Persons 1734 2778 3339 4023

Males 1368 2201 3667 3120

Females 366 574 672 903

Source: Census of India 2011

Population

Total population of four villages within 10 Km radius of the project area collected from 2011

census hand book and it was found total population of 67092.

Household Size

The term ‘Household’ is defined in census as a group of persons who commonly live together

and would take their meals from common kitchen. There are 17552 households in the study

area as per 2011 census. Average person per household in the study area is 4 (3.882) indicating

nuclear families.

Occupation structure

The main occupation of the local villagers is agriculture, animal husbandry like goat raring,

cattle farming for milk etc, and many of them are dependent on the quarry and associated work

in the surrounding area.

The lockdown due to Covid-19 has contributed to job loss of many daily wage workers and

also resulted in negative growth of the development at both state and Centre. The financial loss

and job loss thus created can be revitalized by approving the proposed mining and quarrying



activities. The materials mined out from the proposed quarry will be available in the local

market for construction and developments.

Figure 3.27 Photographs of Social Interaction

3.12 Public Utilities

Bank, schools and post office are available at Athikkayam. Whereas Hospital, market facilities,

higher educational and transportation facilities are available at Ranny Taluk which are at a

distance of 7.6 km from the lease area. The mode of transportation for local people is bus,

railways, auto rickshaw and two wheelers.

Table 3-54 Public Utilities in the Project Location


1 Taluk & District Ranny, Pathanamthitta

2 Nearest habitation Nearest habitation- 208m N



4 Nearest town Koothattukulam -1.4km-NE

5 Nearest Airport Cochin International Airport -94.7km-NW




6 Nearest Highway / Roads SH 44 - 4.7km - NE

NH 183A- 5.6km - S

7 Nearest Railway Station Chengannur railway station -27.5 km -SW

8 Power supply KSEB Overseer Office, Athikkayam -3.1 km-S

9 Water Source Open Well

10 Nearest Hospital / dispensary Government Hospital, Vechoochira-1.5km-NE

11 Education facility Government LP School, Edamuri-1.1km-SW

12 Police Station Vechoochira Police Station-1.37 km-NE

13 Fire Station Fire and Rescue Station, Kanjirappally-16.4 km-N

14 Ambulance Government Hospital, Vechoochira-1.5km-NE

15 Church / temple / mosque

St. Joseph’s Catholic Church, Vechoochira -2.13km-

NE

Nusarathul Islam Juma Masjid vechoochira -2.74km -

NE

Edamury mahakshethra samuchayam – 1.1 km -SW

16

Ecological sensitive zone

(National Park, Sanctuary,

Habitat for Migratory Birds,

Tiger Reserve)


17 Nearest Forests Konni Reserve Forest -20.0km-SE


18 Nearest streams/ rivers/ water

bodies (from mine boundary) Pampa River-3.20km-S



Chapter 4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS &

MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1. Introduction

Before starting the mining operations, it is essential to assess the impacts of mining on various

features of environment such as land, air, water, noise, ecology, socio-economic etc, so that

abatement measures could be planned in advance for eco-friendly mining. Opencast, Semi

Mechanized Mining activity causes some adverse impacts on the surrounding environment

unless proper Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is adopted. Selecting suitable sites for

mining and also adopting all the guidelines prescribed by the Ministry of Environment Forests

and Climate change (MoEF&CC) and Department of Mines and Geology (DMG) can minimize

the major possible impacts.

4.2. Environmental Impact Assessment Parameters

The mining activities may affect environment in various ways such as degradation of land, dust

generation, deterioration of water and soil quality, affecting the biological and socio-economic

environment of the area. The impacts of mining on various environmental parameters were

assessed and are given below.

Table 4-1 Parameters of Impact

Sl No Parameter Description

1 Type Positive & Negative

2 Nature Direct, Indirect

3 Magnitude Low, Moderate, High

4 Timing Short time, Long time, Intermittent

5 Duration Temporary, permanent

6 Reversibility Revisable /Irreversible

7 Significance Local, regional & global

4.3. Impact on Land Environment

The mining activity will affect the present landscape of the lease area. The original topography

of the lease area might be affected mainly due to mining operations. The proposed mine land

area is 4.0262Ha, which is private owned land. The details of land area indicating the area

likely to be degraded due to mining will be as given in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Land use Pattern of proposed area during different period

No. Land Use Pre-Operational (Ha) Operational (Ha)

1 Mining area 0.00 3.4048

2 Road 0.00 0.0180



No. Land Use Pre-Operational (Ha) Operational (Ha)

3 7.5m width greenbelt barrier

zone 0.6034 0.6034

4 Virgin Area 2.6409 -

Total 4.0262 4.0262

About 90585 tonnes of topsoil and 92819 tonnes of overburden will be generated during the

mining operations. This topsoil and OB will be utilized for greenbelt development in the 7.5m

barrier. Topsoil and OB will be placed in the area specifically assigned for the purpose. The

development in the 7.5m greenbelt area will create a green barrier and maintain the aesthetic

of the surrounding area.

Land Degradation

The mining activities would result in land degradation due to following activities:

• Excavation of mining lease area

• Storage of topsoil.

Necessary control measures like simultaneous plantation, silt arresting measures and dump

stabilization etc., shall be implemented to minimize the land degradation. The quantity of

expected topsoil generation is very minimum and generated topsoil will be dumped in

predetermined dump location. The stored topsoil will be reused for the reclamation process.

4.4. Impacts on Water Environment

Impacts on Surface Water

There are no seasonal streams within the leasehold area. The seasonal streams could be seen

outside the leasehold area towards south, southwest and northwest side of the lease. The

rainwater draining from the hill slopes and the slopes in the study area carries the silt and

pebbles, which ultimately settles at the connecting streams/river. The rainwater flow, which

enters in the waste dump area may cause waste dump erosion. The proposed garland drains at

the higher elevation will divert the entry of water flow away from the mine.

Impacts on Ground Water

The water table in this region is at a depth of 4-5 m from general surface level. During the 1st

Five-year mining plan period, mining will be carried out from 355 m RL to 270 m RL above

MSL depth from the surface on the hillock, therefore the mining is not likely encounter

groundwater at any time during the scheme period. No chemical having toxic elements will be

used for carrying out mining activity. Also, neither granite nor topsoil contains any kind of

toxic element which can contaminate the water. To check the erosion and prevent silt being

carried during monsoon period, a series of gully checks would be constructed at regular

intervals.



4.5. Impacts on Air Environment

The opencast mining and associated activities are potentially air polluting. The major air

pollutant is the suspended particulate matter. The major reason for air pollution problem is

fugitive dust emission, which prominently depends on various factors like production capacity,

machinery involved, drilling, blasting, excavation, and maintenance of various equipment and

vehicle. Apart from these, there will be other activities associated viz. transportation of Granite

building stone and waste, stocking facilities and dump management within the mine lease area

that may contribute to pollution.

SPM levels will be higher within the active operational areas (mine area) due to drilling,

blasting, excavation, loading/unloading and transportation.

Vehicles travelling over paved or unpaved surfaces tend to crush surface particles and other

debris. Particles are lifted and dropped from the rolling wheels, and the road surface is exposed

to strong air currents due to turbulent shear between the wheels and the surface. Dust particles

are also sucked into the turbulent wave created behind the moving vehicles. The loads carried

by trucks are also potential source of dust, either through wind entrainment or spillages. Mud

and dust carry out from unpaved surfaces is another potential problem.

Gaseous Pollution:

• The gaseous pollutants (SO2 and NO2) are anticipated from Heavy Earth Moving Machineries

like excavator, dumpers, dozer and other transport vehicles.

Particulate Matter

The generation of dust is anticipated from various mining activities i.e. drilling, blasting,

loading, haulage, unloading other activities related to mining. The ambient air quality

monitored during winter season shows that the PM concentrations in the surrounding villages

are within the Ambient Air Quality Standards of CPCB.

4.5.1 Air Emission and Dispersion Model

Air quality modelling is a numerical tool used to describe the causal relationship between

emissions, meteorology, atmospheric concentration, deposition and other factors. In general air

pollution measurement gives important quantitative information about ambient concentration

and deposition at a certain location at specific times. Whereas air quality modelling can give a

more complete deterministic description of air quality problem including an analysis of factors

and causes. In simple words modelling is the mathematical prediction of ambient concentration

of air pollution based on measured inputs.

The modelling is the prediction of the particulate matter concentrations in and around the

mining areas based on the emission, meteorology, topography, deposition and other factors.

Though the dispersion pattern and emission through the dispersion models are difficult to

predict, since there are multiple number of sources of particulate matter generation, and the

meteorology and topography varies widely, but by selecting the partial empirical equations for

each activity at a time this could be possible. The characterization of the particulate matter is



to find the constituent of it such as silica, mineral matter, and diesel exhausts etc. which

determine its harmfulness towards human health.

A. AERMOD CLOUD

The term AERMOD is an abbreviation of American Meteorological Society-Environmental

Protection Agency Regulatory Model (AERMOD). AERMOD View is a complete and

powerful air dispersion modelling package that seamlessly incorporates the popular U.S. EPA

models, AERMOD, ISCST3, and ISC-PRIME into one interface without any modifications to

the models. These models are used extensively to assess pollution concentration and deposition

from a wide variety of sources.

An air dispersion model is a computational way of predicting the concentration based on the

knowledge of emission characteristics, topography and meteorology. AERMOD was

developed by the AERMIC (American Meteorological Society (AMS)/United States

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulatory Model Improvement Committee).

AERMOD model is applicable to both rural and urban areas, surface and elevated releases flat,

complex terrain, and multiple sources such as point, area and volume sources

Basically, AERMOD is a steady-state plume model. It uses, processed meteorological

observations such as wind speed, wind direction, humidity, rainfall, temperature which is first

pre-processed by AERMET and along with the emission characteristics (as mentioned in the

emission rates) it estimates the concentration of the particulate matter released by different

sources. The data flow diagram briefly explains how the model works.

There are some of the required inputs to the AERMOD as listed below:

• Latitude and longitude of the place under consideration

• Base map of the area where modelling is to be performed.

• The pollutants to be modelled

• Hourly met data.

• Receptors

• Terrain data

• The emission factors of the generating sources

• Source locations etc.

B. Area Source Selection

Selecting the source pathway from the options

• Area source is selected by manually entering the data in the table (coordinates, release

heights, etc.) or can be drawn by selecting the drawing tool and moving it on the haul

road direction, Blasting Area, Drilling area, Dumping Area, etc. Other related data such

as emission rate, vehicle height and width (for calculating plume characteristics) etc.



• Emission rate which is established either through field measurement in working mines

& extrapolating the information to required capacity in expansion or using empirical

equations and putting the value of variables from site conditions (Secondary Data

Adopted). Also, the predicted source concentration was calculated with principles EPA

AP 42 for vehicular movement, drilling and blasting, cumulatively in unit of g/s.

• Receptors were arranged in the manner as per CPCB guideline (probes/70/1997-98) to

specify distances for the polar network.

C. Predicted Air Pollution Impacts

Figure 4.1 Isopleth of PM10



Figure 4.2 Isopleth of PM2.5

Figure 4.3 Isopleth of SO2



Figure 4.4 Isopleth of NOx

Figure 4.5 Isopleth of CO



D. Result Representation and Recommendations

First rank values were (Highest Value) selected as the incremental value and added to the

existing background values, which defines the predicted concentration as GLC corresponding

to the source of pollutants.

Table 4-3 Final Output Data- Dispersion Modelling

Sl

No

Parameter Units Baseline

Conc.

Incremental

Conc.

Total

GLC

NAAQ

Standard

Distance

(meter)

&

direction

1 Particulate

Mater (PM10) µg/m3 63.82 6 69.82 100 75m - NE

2 Particulate

Mater (PM2.5) µg/m3 19.82 7 26.82 60

200m -

NW

3 Sulphur

Dioxide (SO2) µg/m3 9.21 3 12.21 80 75m -N

4 Nitrogen

Dioxide(NO2) µg/m3 10.4 4 14.4 80

74m -

NNE

5 Carbon Monoxide

(CO) Mg/m3 0.9 0.313 1.213 2

75m

- NE

Observations

i. None of the predicted concentration (GLC) exceeds the NAAQ Standards.

ii. Parcel flow majorly directed towards N directions

iii. At worst generation sources also, highest concentrations found at 75 m (from Center of

the plot) which is at boundary of the buffer land adjacent to the proposed area in North

and North-East direction.

iv. Impacts can be reduced to the very well extent by attaining a good EMP as

• Should maintain a vehicular Traffic control in operational phase

• Should maintain the existing greenbelt around the site

• Dust suppression procedures should be implemented

• Operation phase activities like drilling and blasting in controlled manner



• Removal and dumping of TS should be in standard practice.

4.6. Impacts on Noise & Vibration Environment

With the mining operations for mine development like drilling, blasting, excavation, loading,

unloading, and transportation of material, it is imperative that noise levels would increase

unless appropriate abatement measures are planned and effectively carried out. The noise and

vibrations mainly generated by mining machineries; background noise levels shall be kept in

the range of 74 to 85 dB (A).

The noise generated from blasting will be for a very short duration and will be conducted during

such time such as at the end of shift or when most of the workers have been withdrawn to safe

places.

Vibration

The blasting cause ground vibration. For assessment of peak particular velocity, the following

formula is followed:

V = 417.8{D/Q0.5} - 1.265

= 417.8 {208/16.880. 5}- 1.265

Where

V = Peak particle velocity in mm/s

D = Distance between location of blast and nearest habitation (gauge point) (208 m).

Q = Quantity of explosive per blasting (Maximum of 16.88 kg).

Vibration levels at the nearest habitation (at 208 m) is observed (calculated through the above

mathematic formula) is 3.7 mm/sec which is within the permissible Peak Particle Velocity

(PPV) value of 15 mm/sec for buildings /structures not belonging to the lease owner as per

DGMS circular no.7.2 of 1997.

➢ Adverse impact on human health like fatigue and behavioural changes and also on fauna

due to increased ambient noise level due to rock excavation, transportation, processing

equipments and ancillaries. Further, the increased ambient noise level causes fear

among faunal species and hence loss of habitat near the mine lease area

➢ Adverse impact of vibrations including damage to structures due to blasting.

4.7. Impacts on Biological Environment

No wildlife sanctuary or national park or biosphere reserves are located within the study area.

Due to hard exposed granite/Charnokite, comparatively there are fewer plantations within the

lease area and most of the plantation within lease area to be removed for implementation of

mining operation within 4.0262 Ha lease area. No plantation outside the lease area shall be

removed for mining or any mining related activities.



Impact on Wildlife:

There is no National Park, Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, Wildlife corridors and

Tiger/Elephant Reserve found within 10 km radius of the project site.

Impact on Flora:

No much adverse impact is envisaged on the existing flora, as there will be no deforestation

outside the lease area due to mining and mining related activities. The removal of plants from

the mining area is inevitable and to balance the impacts, plantation will be developed in the

mining lease area as per reclamation proposal of mining plan. These activities help to improve

the floral cover of the area. The greenery and plantation development will eventually attract

micro fauna, birds etc., in the area. Assistance will be taken from local forest department in

selection of species of plants so that green coverage could improve very fast.

Impact on Fauna:

No endangered species of fauna is found in and around lease area. As such there will be no

adverse impact of the mining activity on fauna around the mining lease area.

4.8. Impacts on Socio economic Environment

The socio-economic impacts of the proposed project could be assessed in terms of demand

supply aspects for goods and services in the area, pressure on natural resources and

infrastructure, growth of industry, sustainability of livelihoods and employment. Some indirect

impacts can also be understood in terms of public health and safety, preserving local culture

and aesthetics of the archaeological monuments and heritage precincts. Based on a close

understanding and assessment, the socio-economic impacts of the proposed project predicted

as follows

Positive Impacts:

i. There is no loss of land and consequential livelihoods, as no land acquisition is

contemplated.

ii. Creation of employment opportunities for about 20 local skilled and semiskilled workers

during project construction and Operation phases.

iii. Development of Infrastructures, Educational, Health facilities and other CER project works

in the local area in consultation with Local Self- Government (LSG’s).

iv. Providing periodical free health check-up facilities to local villagers in nearby villages and

equipment, rooms, etc., Provision of support facilities and Annual health camps at Primary

Health Centre, Pathanamthitta District.

v. Emergence of local entrepreneur in complementary activities such as small business

transportation, equipment repairs and maintenance etc.



Adverse Impacts:

• Air pollution through release of fugitive dust during mining process leading to possible

incidence of respiratory diseases, irrigation of eyes and nose etc., for people living in

the impact zone.

• Possible adverse impact on crop productivity as a result of fugitive dust setting on plants

in the vicinity. And thereby economic problems for farmers.

• Noise pollution may cause hearing problems for people living in the impact zone.

• Crack formations in the nearest building due to vibrations

4.9. Impact Mitigation Measures

4.9.1 Mitigation Measure on Soil Environment

Totally 90585 tonnes of topsoil and 92819 tonnes of OB are expected to be recovered during

the mining period. The generated topsoil during mining operations will not be allowed to be

mixed with other material. The topsoil/OB shall be utilized for plantation in the 0.6034 Ha

Safety barrier/greenbelt area. The excess topsoil will be placed in the dumping area specifically

proposed for the purpose.

• Garland drains shall be made all along the mine for diverting storm water and also for

the regulating the water flow away from the dumps. The water from garland drain shall

be released in the silt settling tank (SST) and the overflow from the SST to the rainwater

harvesting pond (RWHP). The overflow from the RWHP shall be diverted to the natural

course.

• The non-mineralized zone and open areas shall be planted with suitable local trees.

• Plantation will be carried on waste dumps to prevent soil erosion.

4.9.2 Mitigation Measures on Land Environment

The mining activity will affect the present landscape of the lease area. The original topography

of the lease area shall be affected mainly due to mining operations, dumping of waste, roads

etc.

• Plan for restoration of mined-out area by appropriate eco-restoration as per the

progressive mine closure plan.

• The runoff from the mine to be regulated by construction of appropriate drainage

channels through garland drains as per the drainage plan of the mine lease area (which

is part of mining plan) within the core zone and to be channelized to common drainage.

• These measures will ensure final sedimentation of silt and the overflow from the check

dam will be channelized to the natural drain available near the project site.



• Conservation of topsoil for future eco-restoration work. The dump shall be provided at

the lower contour with retaining walls with weep holes and with a garland drain around

the dump.

• Construction of drainage with intermittent silt traps.

4.9.3 Mitigation measures on Surface water

Adequate control measures are being adopted to check not only the wash-off from soil erosion

but also uncontrolled flow of rainwater through mine. The measures to be adopted are:

• Sufficient drains are proposed within mining lease area and also all along the lease

boundary to channelize all the surface water to the proposed silt settling tanks (SST).

• The overflow water from the SST would be directed to RWHP

• The overflow water from the RWHP would be released to the natural water course.

Thus, the only clarified water is released from the mine.

• During rains, water will flow within the mine and in the vicinity, to reduce the velocity

of rainwater flow, sufficient gully checks shall be provided.

• Construction of catch drains and settling tanks around dumps for channelization of

rainwater away from the dumps and to prevent siltation/sedimentation.

• Construction, maintenance and regular cleaning of garland drains, Check dams and

gully plugs.

• Granite Building Stone is chemically stable and non-toxic. There is no toxic element in

the mined-out material, which may contaminate ground/surface water. It is, therefore,

apparent that there will not be any impact of mining on the surface water regime.

Strom Water Management:

Garland drains shall be constructed to divert water away from mining area. The water from the

garland drains shall be directed to the SST and the overflow is diverted to the RWHP. Series

of gully plugs shall be constructed to reduce the flow of running water and for settling of silt

in the running water. The afforestation with good root bearing species minimizes the impacts

due to storm water flow.

Danger of Mine Inundation:

The mine is on a hill slope and no water course, water body or river is on the higher elevation

of the mine. Sufficient Garland drains and the other drainages are planned and maintained

during mining and at the end of the mining, the rainwater and the surface run-off will be

diverted away from the mine to join the natural water downstream course.

4.9.4 Mitigation Measures on Ground Water

• The ground water table is much below the general ground level at the hill bottom. The

proposed mining operations are much above the ground water table. Therefore, the

mining operations on hilltop will not have any adverse impact on either yield movement

or quality of ground water.

• No ground water is going to be encountered during five years mining plan operation;



• Moreover, granite building stone is chemically inert and will not affect the water

quality.

4.9.5 Mitigation Measures on Air Environment

Following measures shall be adopted to mitigate air pollution generated due to the mining

activities:

• Sharp drill bits will be used for drilling to reduce generation of dust.

• Drilling machines will be equipped with water spraying system to prevent dust to get

air borne.

• All the haul roads will be kept properly graded with sufficient width and regular water

spraying is done on the haul roads.

• Proper maintenance of vehicles will be carried out regularly for minimization of

generation of gaseous pollutants.

• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) like dust mask, ear plug/earmuff, goggles, safety

shoe, hand gloves will be provided to all employees

• Development of greenbelt will be done around lease boundary and other places to arrest

dust.

• Air and Dust monitoring shall be conducted at regular interval. Monitors shall be

stationed 25m away from site boundary during drilling, excavation, stockpiling

activities and at post occupancy stage with the help of MoEF/NABL approved

laboratory.

• Tarpaulin covers shall be provided on trucks used for transportation of materials prone

to fugitive dust emissions.

• Watering the areas exposed to wind erosion, avoiding material transportation on un-

watered haul roads, increasing moisture content of excavate material and Waste, etc.

• Total area exposed to wind action, minimizing route lengths and reducing uncovered

areas and pits through re-forestation.

• Emission control efficiency by water spraying program (intensity of the applications

and average time between spray applications).

Water availability being a measure concern, innovative technologies based on water additives

which reduce water evaporation and particulate matter agglomerated over unpaved roads shall

be implemented.

i. Mitigation measures on paved surfaces:

• Prevent spillages of materials on the paved surfaces during material transportation.

• Speed controls on vehicle movements.

• Wind reduction control by plantation.

• Regular cleaning of paved surfaces.

ii. Mitigative measures on Unpaved Surfaces:



• Dust emissions from unpaved surfaces shall be controlled by using water sprinkling

on unpaved areas during dry wind periods, using a water tanker/or fixed sprinklers.

• Chemical stabilization shall be used in association with wet suppression.

• Speed control on the vehicle movements.

• Wind reduction controlled by plantation.

iii. Dust emissions due to vehicles can be minimized by:

• Avoid spillage from the loaded trucks.

• Speed controls on vehicles have an approximately linear effect on dust emissions.

• Water spraying for dust suppression

Vehicular emission of particulates, SO2, NOx, hydrocarbons can be minimized by proper

regular check-up, preventive maintenance and maintenance of vehicles and other oil operated

equipment.

iv. Biological Method for Dust Control:

• Trees can act as efficient biological filters. The systematic and planned greenbelt

development not only reduces the fugitive dust but also checks runoff and improves the

aesthetic beauty of an area. It is a proven technology for waste dump stabilization and

restoration of mined out area.

Green belt of adequate width should be raised by planting native species around the mine lease

area on both sides of haul road

4.9.6 Mitigation measures on Noise Environment

Mitigation measures for noise and ground vibrations are of following types:

1. Prevention at source.

2. Attenuation in transmission path.

3. Protective measures in work environment.

i. Prevention at source:

Noise should be best abated at source by choosing Machinery and equipment suitably, by

proper mounting of equipment and ventilation Systems and by providing noise insulating

enclosures or padding where practical. The equipment to be procured will be new and as such

as the noise emission will be optimal for their design/operation. Proper maintenance/working

will be done which keeps the noise levels within limits.

Blasting shall be conducted only during day light hours. Milli-second delay detonators with

non-electric initiation system shall be adopted to minimize noise and vibration. Rock breakers

shall be used for breaking down large boulders. No secondary blasting will be done to reduce

noise and air blast

ii. Attenuation in transmission path:



At the mine lease Boundary dense belt of trees will be plated to act as acoustic barriers.

Planting of bushy trees of rich canopy in and around the mine area to intercept noise

Transmission will be undertaken. A 7.5 m wide belt of trees of different heights shall be useful

to act as noise attenuator in the mining areas.

iii. Protective measures in the work environment:

Protective earmuffs and earplugs will be provided for those exposed to high noise levels as per

statutory requirements; the noise level exposure shall be maintained within the prescribed

limits under The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000. The blasting

parameters will be suitably set to minimize ground vibration within safety limit; Shock

absorbing techniques will be adopted to reduce impact energy.

4.9.7 Mitigation Measures on Biological Environment

i. Measures for Minimizing Impact on Fauna

Following measures will be adopted to minimize the impact of mining on faunal

environment of the area.

• Greenery development will help in creating habitats for local faunal species and to

create better environment for various fauna.

• Creating and developing awareness for nature and wildlife in the adjoining villages.

ii. Measures for Minimizing Impact on Flora - Greenbelt Development:

• Plantation will be carried out in the lease area with a view to provide greenbelt and to

give an aesthetic look, for eliminating fugitive emissions and controlling impact of

noise etc. Additional plantation will be providing within the greenbelt barrier zone,

almost 1000 nos of trees will be plant at an interval of 3.m.

• Species proposed for Greenbelt/ Plantation are Artocarpus heterophyllus (Plavu),

Artocarpus Hirsutus(Anjili),Mangifera indica(Maavu), Tectona grandis (Thekku),

Terminalia paniculata(Maruthu), Phyllanthus emblica (Nelli) Pterocarpusmarsupium

(Venga) Bambusoideae Careya (mula) Careya arborea (Pezhu) Briedelia retusa

(Mulluvenga) Garcinia gummigutta (Kudambuli).

• This help in reducing the spread of pollutants and will also be effective in attenuating

noise levels.

4.9.8 Mitigation measures on Socio-Economic environment

Mitigation measures on the negative impacts on social economic,

• Regular water sprinklings will be carried on haulage roads and all dust prone areas.

• Sharp drill bits will be used to reduce the emission of air borne dust.



• Coir mating will be planned on waste dumps.

• Install appropriate dust control equipment to check air pollution.

• Organize quarterly health camps in the area to check the incidence of any respiratory

and other related disorders.

Occupational Safety and Health Environment:

Occupational health and safety hazards occur during the operational phase of mining and

primarily include the following:

Respiratory hazards:

Long-term exposure to silica dust may cause silicosis. The following measures are proposed:

• The cabin of Excavators, dumpers, dozers and other automated equipment’s will be

closed

• Use of personal breathing protection will be made compulsory.

Noise:

• No employee will be exposed to a noise level greater than 75 dB(A) for a duration of

more than 8 hours per day without hearing protection

• The use of hear protection equipment will be enforced actively when the equivalent

sound level reaches greater than 75 dB (A).

• Earmuffs provided will be capable of reducing sound levels.

• Periodic medical hearing checks will be performed on workers exposed to high noise

levels.

Physical hazards:

• Specific personnel training on work-site safety management will be taken up

• Work site assessment will be done by rock scaling of each surface exposed to workers

to prevent accidental rock falling and / or landslide, especially after blasting activities;

• Maintenance of yards, roads and footpaths, providing sufficient water drainage and

preventing slippery surfaces with an all-weather surface, such as coarse gravel will be

taken up.

Occupational Health Survey:

All the persons will undergo initial medical examination at the time of joining and 20% of the

work force shall be examined every year as per Mines Act 1952. The following tests would be

undertaken

• General physics tests

• Audiometric tests

• Full chest, X-ray, Lung function tests, Spiro metric tests

Essential medicines will be provided at the site. The medicines and other test facilities will be

provided free of cost.



The first aid box will be made available at the mine for immediate treatment. Employees are

monitored for occupational diseases by conducting the following tests.

• Periodic medical examination – Once in 5 Years.

• Lung function test – yearly, those who are exposed to dust

• Audiometry – yearly

• Chest X-ray once in five years

• Eye test

4.10. Conclusion on the Characterisation of Impacts

Table 4-4 Conclusion on Characterisation of Impacts

Sl No Impacts on Characterisation

1 Land Environment Negative, direct, moderate, long term, permanent and

regional impacts

2 Water Environment The mining activity will have no negative or direct,

long term, permanent and regional impact on the water

environment.

3 Air environment Negative, Direct, low, short time, temporary and local

4 Noise & Vibration Direct, Low, Short term, Temporary and local

5 Biological environment Negative, direct, low, short time, temporary, revisable

and local impact on the ecological environment.

6 Socio- economic Positive, direct, moderate, long term, permanent and

regional impacts



Chapter 5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1. Alternative Technology

Type of mining is contingent on geological, topographical conditions of the mine lease area,

type of mineral and production capacity envisaged. The mining activity proposed as stone

boulders mining with maximum annual capacity of 188637.8 MT. The extraction capacity is

high, and manual method is ruled out. The proposed mining method is for extraction of mineral

and ROM is opencast mechanized with drilling and blasting. Bench height and width will be

maintained as 5m. Blast holes of 1.0 to 1.50 m depth will be drilled with help of 32mm drill

rod, Jack hammer and Air Compressor of 100 cfm capacity. Loading of blasted material is

proposed with 2.5 cum bucket capacity excavator in dumpers of 15 tonnes capacity.

Topsoil/OB shall be removed separately and stored at the place earmarked for it and used for

green belt development.

5.2. Alternative Site

The mineral exploration of minor mineral in the mine lease area is facilitated by the lease of

the land by Government of Kerala. The project is mineral specific and there is abundance of

the mineral in the mine lease area.

The proposed mine lease area is however found to be away from any ecologically sensitive /

protected areas. There are no archaeological, historical, cultural or defence installations within

10 km from the mine lease boundary. There is no national park and wildlife

sanctuary/ecologically sensitive area within 10 km from the mine lease boundary. The mine

lease area is not part of any flood plain nor in the land slide vulnerable zone as per the hazard

zonation map published by State Disaster Management Authority. The nearest habitation is

208 m. from the boundary of the pit area. Due to the above-mentioned reasons, there is no need

for alternative site.



Chapter 6. ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

6.1 Introduction

Environment Monitoring is an essential part to check the impact of project related activity.

Hence monitoring of various environment parameters will be carried out on a regular basis to

ascertain the following:

• Status of Pollution within the mine site and in its vicinity.

• Generate data for predictive or corrective purpose in respect of pollution.

• Examine the efficiency of pollution control system adopted at the site.

• To assess environmental impacts.

Monitoring will be carried out at the site as per the norms of Central Pollution Control Board.

Environmental Monitoring Program will be conducted for various environmental components

as per conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance (EC) issued by SEIAA and Consent

to Operate (CTO) issued by Kerala State Pollution Control Board.

Objectives : The objectives of the environmental monitoring program are:

➢ Evaluation of the efficiency of mitigation and pollution control measures / equipment /

devices

➢ Updating of the actions and impacts of baseline data

➢ Adoption of additional mitigation measures if the present measures are insufficient

Methodology: Monitoring methodology covers the following key aspects:

• Components to be monitored

• Parameters for monitoring of the above components

• Monitoring frequency

• Monitoring standards

• Responsibilities for monitoring

o Direct responsibility

o Overall responsibility

• Monitoring costs.

6.2 Activities

A. Slope Failure:

Regular inspection shall be carried out to examine slope stability, mine faces. Observations

shall also be made by regular checking for land erosion possibility in hill slopes/backfill area.



The observation and study include, study for slope failures and excess erosions both along the

pit and the topsoil dumps, Periodic analysis of mine drainage and Study of bunds/retaining

walls/garland drain/gully plugs at the waste dumps area and other area inside and outside the

lease.

B. Drainage:

The effectiveness of drainage system depends upon proper cleaning of all drains and sumps.

Regular checking of the garland drain and natural water course shall be carried out to find any

blockage due to silting or accumulation of loose materials. The drains shall also be checked for

any damage in lining / stone pitching etc.

C. Blasting Effect:

Regular testing and inspection of blasting operations in work zone shall be carried out with

respect to noise, fly rock throw, vibration, dust and fume generation. These tests shall be

conducted six monthly or whenever new patterns of blasting shall be adopted for rock

fragmentation. The blast vibration shall be maintained ensure that the vibration levels area well

below the permissible limit of 15mm/sec (DGMS limits).

D. Re-vegetation and Greenbelt Development:

Greenbelt development as per the scheduled plan shall be reviewed every year. Post plantation

status shall be regularly checked every season and the plantation related data/information shall

be kept and compiled every year.

The distance between the plants shall be 3 m and the watering shall be done twice in a week

during summer and post monsoon season. The required fertilizing shall be done after soil

testing and consultation with expert, local research institutes. Forest departments will be

consulted for the plantation work.

Environmental monitoring of the parameters involved and the threshold limits specified are

discussed below

6.3 Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) Monitoring

Ambient air quality parameters recommended are Particulate Matter (Size Less than 10μm) or

PM10, Particulate Matter (Size Less than 2.5μm) or PM2.5, Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2). These parameters are to be monitored at designated locations (as

explained in Chapter 3, core zone, upwind & downwind) starting from the day of operation of

mining activity once in six months. The monitoring methodology will be carried out as per

CPCB guidelines.

6.4 Noise Level Monitoring

The measurements for monitoring noise levels would be carried out at all sensitive locations

near to the mine lease area in the buffer zone, once in six months.



The vibration level shall be measured as per the assessment criteria given under Bureau of

Indian Standard Criteria for Safety and Design Structures Subject to Underground Blasts-IS:

6922-1973 (reaffirmed1995), once in year.

6.5 Soil Monitoring

The soil sample quality in the core zone and buffer zone will be carried out once in a year.

6.6 Water Quality Monitoring

The physical, chemical & bacteriological parameters recommended for analysis of water

quality will be carried out once in six months as per IS:10500.

6.7 Ecological Environment Monitoring

The ecological assessment of the core zone and the buffer zone to be carried out once in 5

years.

6.8 Socio- Economic Environment Monitoring

The socio-economic profile and the changed social profile of the buffer zone due to the mining

activity is to be carried out once in 5 years.

Occupational Health

• Quarrying operations should have some form of occupational health program in place.

• Occupational health is about protecting the physical and mental health of workers and

ensuring their continual welfare in their working environment. In addition to preventing ill

health, other important aspects of occupational health include:

o Ensuring fitness and physical capability to perform a job safely

o Health education and promotion

o Providing medical services including health surveillance

o Rehabilitation after illness or injury.

• Recruitment of employees shall be based on the skill set requirement of specific trade in

the mining activity ranging from supervision to manual work.

• All employees will undergo health monitoring during recruitment and periodically during

employment depending on the age of employee. During operation of mine, the health

monitoring of workers shall be done as per the guidelines of DGMS.

• All employees will be provided with personal protective equipment depending on the trade,

ranging from helmets, safety shoes, dust masks, safety goggles, gloves, ear plugs and

earmuffs.

• The employees are made aware of the hazards related to mining activities and transportation

of aggregate and the occupational safety practices to be adopted to ensure safe work

environment.



6.9 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Monitoring shall be carried out at the locations to assess the environmental health in the

operational period. A study monitoring programme is important as it provides useful

information on the following aspects.

• It helps to verify the predictions on environmental impacts presented in this study.

• It helps to indicate warnings of the development of any alarming environmental

situations, and thus, provides opportunities for adopting appropriate control measures

in advance.

The monitoring programmes in different areas of environment, outlined in the next few

sections, have been based on the findings of the impact assessment studies described in Chapter

4. Post study monitoring programme have been summed up in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Environmental Monitoring During Project Planning Stage

SL

No

Particulars Monitoring

Frequency

Standards Duration of

sampling

Important monitoring

parameters

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

1 At 4

locations

(core zone1,

up wind 1,

down wind

1, sensitive

1)

Once in six

months

Air

(Prevention

and

Control of

Pollution)

Rules,

CPCB

1994

24hrs PM10,

PM2.5,

NOx,

SO2,

CO

Noise Level Monitoring

2 Noise level

at 4

locations

Once in six

months

Noise

standard by

CPCB

24hrs Equivalent Noise levels in

dB (A)

3 Vibration

study

Once in a

year

DGMS

standard

- -

Soil Quality Monitoring

4 One Soil

sample from

core zone

Once in a

year

EIA

guidance

manual on

mining of

minerals

o Soil Type

o Colour

o Moisture content

o Conductivity

o pH at 25oC

o Organic Carbon

o Total nitrogen

o Phosphorus



SL

No


Frequency


sampling


parameters

o Chlorides

o Sodium Absorption

ratio

o Cation Exchange

Capacity

Water Quality Monitoring

5 At 3

locations

- 2 ground

water

sample and

1 surface

water

sample in

the

downstream

Once in six

months

As per IS:

10500

o pH at 250C

o Odour

o Colour

o Turbidity

o Total Dissolved

Solids

o Total Hardness as

CaCO3

o Chloride as Cl

o Sulphate as SO4

o Alkalinity as CaCO3

o Iron as Fe

o Calcium as Ca

o Magnesium as Mg

o E.coli or

thermotolerant

coliform bacteria

6 Hydro-

geological

study

Once in three

year

As per

CGWA

guidelines

Depth of ground water

table

Ecological Environment

7 Ecological

assessment

study

Once in

Five years

- 1 week 1. Flora, fauna

(terrestrial & aquatic)

including zoo plankton,

phytoplankton and

benthos.

2. Survival of sapling

plants.

Socio-economic Environment

8 Socio

economic

Once in

Five years

- 1 week Per capita income,

Health index



SL

No


Frequency


sampling


parameters

Profile of

the buffer

zone

9 All

employees

in the mine

I. At the

time of

recruitment

II. Every 5

years to age

<30; every 4

years to age

31 – 40; and

every 2 years

to age 41-50;

Once a year

above 50

years.

Chest X- ray, spiro-metry

and vision testing, Far &

Near Vision

Colour Vision

and Hearing tests

The overall responsibility of monitoring the above parameters lies with the environmental

management and monitoring cell lead by the Environmental Officer who reports to the head of

the organization. The monitoring shall be conducted by NABL/MoEF&CC accredited

laboratory. Also, the Environmental Officer would be monitoring performance of pollution

control devices proposed and appropriate steps needs to get the performance of the pollution

control devices.



Chapter 7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 General

This chapter broadly looks at various aspects related to Public Consultation, Risk & Disaster

Management, Social Impact and Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) activities. And

as per the instruction in approved ToR (1259(A)/EC2/2019/SEIAA dated 12/11/2020), special

effect of cumulative cluster condition is considered in every aspects of study such as drainage,

traffic movement, hydrogeology and Social aspects.

7.2 Public Consultation

The project proponent is required to conduct public consultation as per EIA Notification, 2006

since the effective mining area is more than 5 hectares under cluster condition. Public

consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of Local affected persons and others

who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the mining activity with a view to

take into account all the material concerns which are appropriate. Draft EIA report and

application for the conduction of public hearing was submitted before KSPCB on 16/12/2020.

The authority considered the application and the public hearing was scheduled on 03/03/2021,

and the notice for the hearing was published in the same newspaper on 28.01.2020. Public

hearing was conducted at Manimalethu Auditorium, Vehcoochira, Pathanaththitta. The

proceedings/minutes of public hearing and replay for the concerns from public is attached as

Annexure No.10.

7.3 Risk Assessment and Hazard Management

7.3.1 Objectives and Scope

Risk analysis has been carried out to identify the activities and materials considered hazardous

and to prepare the emergency and disaster management plan for the hazards and risks

anticipated from opencast mechanized mining activity for building stone mining activity. The

risk assessment involves hazard identification, hazard analysis followed by disaster

management plan for the identified hazards. The main objectives of preparing a disaster

management plan in mining project include:

• To protect workers in mines from accident

• To prevent or reduce the incidence and severity of injury during mining operations

• To respond immediately and adequately in case of a serious accident

7.3.2 Mining Activity

The lessee obtained a mine lease over an area of 4.0262 ha. The mechanized mining activity

involves site clearance, construction of haulage road, drilling, blasting, excavation, loading and

transportation of mineral. The services required for the mining activity are construction of

office shed, rest room, toilets, magazine for storage of explosives, residential. The mine lease



area is spread over a hillock and partially at ground level. The topsoil/OB waste will be stored

at the earmarked area in the south direction outside the mine lease area.

i. Blasting Hazards

Blasting in mining areas may give rise to ground vibrations. Fly rock is another problem that

deserves attention. Based on the ground vibration studies made earlier, proper precautions will

be taken during blasting operations for controlling the ground vibrations. The management plan

for addressing the various impacts due to blasting operations is presented below.

Controlled blasting technique will be adopted in this project in order to reduce blast vibrations.

Further, charge per delay will be regulated to minimize blast vibrations. Proper hook-up will

be adopted while firing the drill holes. Moreover, the experience gained in other open cast

mines would be gainfully utilized to limit the ground vibration levels within the prescribed

limit of 15 mm/sec (as per DGMS).

In addition, the following guidelines will be adopted wherever required to check the ground

vibrations: -

• NONEL technology will be adopted for blasting

• The maximum charge per delay will be taken so as to limit the PPV values below of

the permissible DGMS limit 15 mm/sec.

• Optimum delay sequence and stem to column ratio will be maintained to minimize the

fly rock distance and ground vibration intensity.

• Basing on the distance of the nearest sensitive areas from the epicentre of the blast,

charge weight will be altered to meet the stipulated standards.

• Design of optimum blast hole geometry considering bench height, diameter of hole,

type of explosive, nature of rock, level of fragmentation required etc.

• Divide total charge/ blast in several parts so as to keep minimum explosive per delay

i.e., use of millisecond delay detonators & relays.

• Avoid concentration of explosive by using deck charging.

• Avoiding blasting in unfavourable weather conditions.

ii. Fly Rock control measures

There are a large number of factors that influence fly rocks. Most important of these factors

are long explosive columns with little stemming at the mouth of the hole, irregular shape of

face, long water column in holes, loose stones on face of the surface blasting area, and strong

wind.

However, certain preventive measures will be taken to minimize the risks arising from flying

fragments. These are: -



➢ Marking of danger zone:- The area falling within 250 m of the blasting area will be

marked off as danger zone with red flags, or other appropriate signs, and entry of any

unauthorized person into this zone will be prohibited during blasting operation.

➢ Warning signals:- An audible warning signal will be given, fifteen minutes before

actual firing of blast to enable persons to move out of danger zone. For this purpose, a

set of sirens/ hooters will be provided at appropriate places.

➢ Providing blasting shelters:- In order to protect the personnel engaged in blasting

operations, blasting shelters will be provided for taking shelter during blasting.

iii. Air Blast control measures

The release of explosive energy through air and movement of fragmented rocks are primary

causes for noise and air over pressure during blasting.

Adoption of following measures while carrying out blasting operation will help in reducing

the intensity of air blasts and will also minimize the noise level associated with the air blasts.

The measures suggested are: -

• Avoiding overcharging of blast holes

• Adequate stemming

• Maintaining proper inter-hole & inter-row delays.

7.3.3 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

i. Fall of Sides

• Flatter slopes angles are adopted where occurrences of loose earth are encountered.

• No disaster like land slide, flood or inundation or fire is anticipated in this case.

• Unmanageable heights are not created.

• Loose rocks are properly dressed.

• Nature and structure of the rocks are properly studied for their slips.

• The faces will slope at 70°.

• The hanging wall, footwall, and mineralized zone are competent to stand safely for long

time.

ii. Storage and use of explosives

• Proper and safe storage of explosives in approved and Licensed Magazine.

• Proper, safe and careful handling and use of explosives by competent Blasters having

Blaster ’s Certificate of Competency issued by DGMS.

• Proper security system to prevent theft/pilferage, unauthorized entry into Magazine

area and checking authorized persons to prevent carrying of match box, lights, mobile

phones, cigarette or Beedi, etc.

• The explosives of class 2 will be used in their original cartridge packing and such

cartridge shall not be cut to remove explosive for making cartridge of different size.



• Detonators will be conveyed in special containers. These will not be carried with other

explosives.

• The holes which have been charged with explosives will not be left unattended till

blasting is completed.

• Before starting charging, clear audible warning signals by Sirens will be given so that

people nearby can take shelter.

• Blasting operations will be carried out in day times only. Also, the mining operations

are proposed to be carried out in day times.

iii. Storage of oil & fuel

• Due care will be taken to avoid oil spillage.

• Storage will not be allowed beyond necessity.

• Fuel oil and lubricants will be stored only in approved containers in separate store

rooms. Match box, lighters, mobile phone, dry wood, plastic, paper sheets and smoking

will not be allowed near the storage area.

7.3.4 Disaster Management Plan

During mining activities, proper measures will be taken to ensure safety at site. In order to

handle disaster / emergency situations, an organizational chart entrusting responsibility to

various project personnel will be prepared with their specific roles during emergency.

The possible composition of the management team shall be: -

1. Mines Manager

2. Section In-charge

3. Site Controller

4. Incident Controller

5. Personnel /Administrative Manager

6. Communication Officer

7. Fire and Security Officer

8. Transport Coordinator

9. Medical Coordinator

10. Media Representatives

11. Communication Coordinator

Following infrastructure and operational system will be provided to meet any emergencies.

i. Emergency Control Room

This will be situated in an area away from the places of fire and will be provided with the

following facilities: -

a) Master plan of the mines.

b) First aid boxes.



c) Gas masks.

d) Telephone line with STD facility.

e) Loud hailers.

f) Emergency lighting system.

g) Stretchers.

h) Transport facility

i) Emergency control room will function as control base

ii. Assembly Points

Assembly points are to be set up farthest from the location of likely hazardous events, where

pre-designated persons from the works, contractors and visitors would assemble in case of

emergency. Up-to-date list of pre-designated employees of various departments must be

available at these points so that roll call could be taken. Pre-designated persons would take

charge of these points and mark presence as the people come into it.

iii. Communication System

Different types of alarms to differentiate types of emergencies will be provided. Alarms will

be followed by an announcement over Public Address System. In case of failure of alarm

system, communication will be by telephone operator who will make announcement in

industrial complex through Public Address System which should be installed. Walkie-talkie

and paging systems, using predetermined codes of communication, are very useful during

emergency. If everything fails, a messenger will be used for sending the information.

iv. Warning System and Control

The Control Centres will be located at an area of minimum risk or vulnerability in the premises

concerned, taking into account the wind direction, areas which might be affected by

fire/explosion, toxic releases, etc. For promptness and efficiency, the premises/storage sites

may be divided into number of zones, which should be clearly marked on the site plan

v. Emergency Services

This includes the fire-fighting system, first aid centre, hospital etc. Alternate sources of power

supply for operating fire pumps, communication with local bodies, fire brigade etc., will also

be clearly identified. Adequate number of external and internal telephone connections will be

installed.

vi. Fire Protection System

The fire protection system for the proposed mine will consist of,

• Hydrant system for all the areas of the mine.

• Portable hand appliances of suitable types/capacities for extinguishing small fires in

selected areas of the mine/storage areas.

7.3.5 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during mining of operation phases is of concern. Safety plan

will be prepared and implemented in the proposed site. The preparedness of an industry for the



occurrence of possible disasters is known as emergency plan. The disaster is possible due to

collapse of rock structures and fire/explosion etc. Keeping in view the safety requirement

during mining a safety policy will be formulated with the following regulations: -

• To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work

• To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the

operation and maintenance of men, machinery and equipment

• To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees

• To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing

and to ensure their proper use

• To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their work which

are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety

• To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making necessary

changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up to date

knowledge

• To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness

at work

• To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to employees in

health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is given to these matters

• To ensure proper implementation of fire prevent ion methods and an appropriate

firefighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this

service

• To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness and

incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to taking corrective,

remedial and preventive action

• To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and safety

matters to ensure effective participation by all employees

• To publish / notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language of

employees

• To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation / processes involved in at

site; and

• To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all

buildings, equipment, workplaces and operations.

i. Safety Organization - Conceptual / Planning Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer shall be appointed. The responsibilities of the safety

officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice

on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training programs and provide

professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He is

also responsible to ensure compliance of Safety Rules / Statutory Provisions.

ii. Safety Circle



In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of hazardous

processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be constituted in each area of

work. The circle would consist of 3-5 employees from each area. The circle normally will meet

for about an hour every week.

iii. Safety Training

Safety training will be provided by the Safety Officers. In addition to regular employees,

limited contractor labours will also be provided safety training. To create safety awareness

safety films will be shown to workers and leaflets will be distributed. Some precautions and

remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires are: -

• Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops

• Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and interlocks

for alarms are effective protection methods

• Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and regular fire

watching system strengthens fire prevention and firefighting; and

• Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.4 Social Impact Assessment

7.4.1 Introduction - Corporate Environment Responsibility

Community need assessments seek to gather accurate information representative of the needs

of a community. Assessments are performed prior to taking action and are used to determine

current situations and identify issues for action, establishing the essential foundation for vital

planning. The process is an invaluable tool for involving the public in solving problems and

developing goals.

As there are no habitations in the core zone area, no rehabilitation or resettlement is involved.

The existing environmental scenario in respect of ambient air quality, water quality, noise

levels, water aspects, biological aspects, etc. show that all these environmental parameters are

within the statutorily prescribed levels. As such, impact due to the project will be positive on

socio-economic aspects. It will be ensured that the buffer zone of the mine lease will be

properly preserved environmentally in all respects within sustainable limits through necessary

monitoring. The project will be operated with care for minimizing environmental impacts with

proper EMP measures for pollution control which will be continued in future also. The

quarrying operation will result in direct employment opportunities for about 20 persons.

Because of such employment prospects and enhancement of income levels of local community,

their lifestyle, conditions of living, educational and health status, etc. will considerably

improve. Besides, there are also benefits to the State and the Central governments through

financial revenues by way of royalty, tax, duties, etc. from this project directly and also

indirectly. From the above details, it is clear that the project operations will have highly

beneficial CER Activities; Proponent will implement CER activities to the local community

around the project site. The CER schemes are identified to meet the specific needs and

requirement of the concerned group / person of any organization / Institutions. Proponent has



planned to spend around Rs.7 lakhs as non-recurring for various activities like providing fund

to local needy poor persons for Educational aid, Medical aid, etc.

7.4.2 Suggested Sectors to Perform Activities under CER

• Drinking water supply,

• Sanitation,

• Health,

• Education,

• Roads,

• Cross drains,

• Electrification including solar power,

• Solid waste management facilities,

• Rainwater harvesting,

• Avenue plantation,

• Plantation in community areas etc.

7.4.3 Approach adopted for assessment

To conduct the assessment, primary & secondary data were used.

Primary Data: Stakeholder interviews, unstructured interview, field observation, and

telephonic survey.

Secondary data: Yearly Project Document and Development Charter of the Panchayat,

Census Report 2011.

7.4.4 Proposed CER activities:

The CER proposal will be prepared in accord with the MoEF Office Memorandum regarding

Corporate Environment Responsibility (F.No.22-65/2017-1A.III) dated 01/05/2018; where the

funding allocated for the community activities is 2% of the capital investment.

The proposed CER activities as discussed with local panchayat about the proposed CER

activities which are being taken up and detailed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Summary of CER Activities Proposed

Sl No Area of Intervention No of intervention Expenses

1

Promotion of Education –

Project will support

improvement of infra-

structural facilities of Govt.

School Edamuri

School renovation

Classroom tiling 1,00,000

3,00,000

Projector & computer 1,00,000

Shelves and Racks 50,000

locker facility for keeping

the equipments and

Books for library

50,000




2

The project will be

implemented for welfare of

Promotion of Health care

units in.

Water Dispenser with

Purifier 2,00,000

3,00,000 Wheel chair &

Stretcherfor patients

1,00,000

3

Improvement of Social

Aspects

All Activities will be

carried out through LSGD

House renovation works 3,00,000

5,00,000

Solar Led streetlights 1,00,000

Waste management

System (Provision of

waste bins)

1,00,000

Total Rs.

11,00,000

The letter from the satutary borads were obtained for the detailed CER proposal is attached as

Annexure 11. The proposed activities will be implemented in the first two year of mining

period and the maintaintence of the implemented work will be ensure in the remaining mining

period.

7.5 Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R & R) Action Plan

There is no displacement of people from the core zone of the project, hence Rehabilitation &

Resettlement (R & R) is not applicable to the instant project. The nearest habitation is at a

distance of 208 m away from the pit boundary of the lease area.

7.6 Slope Stability

The Slope stability refers to the condition of inclined soil or rock slopes to withstand or undergo

movement. The stability of a slope is essentially controlled by the ratio between the available

shear strength and the acting shear stress, which can be expressed in terms of a safety factor if

these quantities are integrated over a potential (or actual) sliding surface. Slope stability is

ultimately determined by two factors: the angle of the slope and the strength of the materials

on it. In this case the block above the Charnockite is transported soil generated from the mined

area on the eastern side of proposed site. There are vegetations of the soil in the western side.

7.6.1 Geotechnical Stability

1. The mining prospect is on the western side of the charnockite ridge striking NNW-SSE.

In the mining prospect soil occurs as thin cover on charnockite with inliers of

charnockite cropping out on the slopping surface. The soil above the rock strata has to

be removed before mining starts.

2. Currently the soil on the slope is stable, since the thickness of soil is comparatively less

and the slope of the area is 25.6o across the contour. There is not much of slope changes

along or across the counter rulings or unevenness of the geomorphic surface in the

prospect area.



Micro-Slope Inclination

Slope stability is ultimately determined by two factors: the angle of the slope and the strength

of the materials on it. From the contour and slope analysis within the proposed site, it is

showing a gentle slope at the site towards west side with an average slope of 25.6o. The

contour spacing in at the site is almost equal win an average spacing of 8-9m for a contour

interval of 5m. A slight difference is only visible at Eastern edge aligned to BP8 to BP9

(contour space of 6.5m) and near to the BP1-BP12 edge (contour space of 12.5m). Even when

considering the micro-slopes at these critical contours the maximum and minimum slope of

microsections is 21o and 39o respectively, hence the section is free from slip or slide failures.

Table 7-2 Average slope in three sections

Elevation A-A’ B-B’ C-C’ Average along

contour

Average across

the contour 24 26 27 25.6



Figure 7.1 Sections Profiles of Site for Micro-slope Study

Soil thickness

Table 7-3 Soil thickness across the sections

Elevation A-A’ B-B’ C-C’ Average along

contour

Average across the

contour 1 1.1 1 1

7.6.2 Soil Thickness and slope stability

The proposed area is mostly covered with vegetation. But the northern east side of the area is

having a mining activity before and hence no topsoil present. The rock excavated in bench

wise slope section having good stability. As per the production plan the bench formation for

the proposed quarry is starting from these mined areas. And as the bench formation moves

towards the west side, there are vegetation on soil. This topsoil has to remove for mining. The

average slope angle of site is 25.6° towards WS direction, and the average soil thickness is 1

m; Since slope angle and soil thickness is smaller it is safe.

Soil Stratigraphy: The accuracy of stability evaluation of a natural slope consisting of

multiple soil and rock layers, regardless the adopted analysis methods, can be highly

dependent upon a precise description of the subsurface soil/rock stratigraphy. Thickness soil



in different profiles is given in Table 7-3. The soil thickness is negligible as shown in Figure

7.1 and distributed evenly of the slope. As the top soil is removing for the mining activities

the chance of soil slide/slip within the site is minimum. And as compare to the surrounding

areas, the proposed site is the top side of hilly terrain.

Seepage from slope face: The free subsurface flow within the site will be controlled by proper

garland drains in order to avoid excess water logs in soil. Distance of drain will cover entire

area to increase the distance better is the stability.

Vegetation helps the Slope stability in the greenbelt zones and act as a disturbance barrier to

the surrounding.

Vibrations: The strong vibration caused by blasting load might affect the soil stability and

provision of greenbelt zone will protect the surroundings and also, as the mining operation

will avoid in the rainy season, the chance of failure due to vibration is less.

7.6.3 Stability Rating Parameters in Mine Area Before the Mining Operations

1. Slope inclination: The average Slope of site is 25.6o, hence safe.

2. Soil Stratigraphy: Clay silt Combination which is middle in the scale with average

thickness of 1m.

3. Slope height: Maximum bench height of 5m and gradient control the stability.

4. Vegetation: Diversified vegetation distributed all along the mine prospect, Gives the

highest stability.

5. Previous landslide activity: None within or around proposed site.

Assessment of the above parameters indicate that this slope of the mine prospect has only

slight potential for instability before the mining Operations.

Solutions

To prevent such accelerated transport entire soil cover (90585 tonnes) of the mining area is

removed from whole of the mining prospect before the start of operations.

a. The soil thus removed will be dumped in without any possibilities of

draining off the mud, sediments and aggregates

b. Lower level of the envisaged mine is at 265 m where the bench will be flatten

and all baseline drainage is located at this level. All vertical or inclined

hydrological movement will truncate here.

c. The soil dump will be heaped up with gentler slopes and retaining barriers

preventing accelerated suspended sediment carriage in the network.

d. The minor increase in the suspended stuff from soil coated on the surface

will get settled in the retainers developed as a part of the drainage system

developed before mining.

e. Since the soil is compactly packed and wet, no air borne sediments are

expected during excavation, transportation or storage at a different location.



f. Slope stability is ultimately determined by two factors: the angle of the slope

and the strength of the materials on it. Materials on the surface is removed

and angle of slope is kept the least.

7.6.4 Stability of Slope above (east) the Mine Prospect

A detailed description of the factors of safety is given in section above

1. The prospect falls in the SW side of an elongated hill trending parallel to the regional

strike (NNW-SSE). Major portion of the proposed prospect is on the dip slope

(gentler) making it more stable. The major rock type in the site is charnockite which

is massive and devoid of any planes of weakness.

2. If the forces available to resist movement are greater than the forces driving

movement, the slope is considered stable.

3. Geomorphologic regional set up: Eastern boundary of the prospect is parallel to the

355 m contour. The geomorphic surface east of the prospect is defined by

Charnockite mass with feeble weathering staggered on the southwester gentler slope.

The escarpment steeper slope on the opposite side of the ridge and is devoid of any

weathering or rock fall or Cliff fall.

Figure 7.2 The terrain view of proposed site



Figure 7.3 Section view of site

From the figure it is shown that the proposed a rea having gentle slope towards west side.

And the NE side having bench formation and it showing presence of hard uniform single

rock strata, which devoid the chance of slope failure in the site.

A

B

B

A



Figure 7.4 Plan and Sectional view of production plan

7.6.5 Stability Rating parameters during Mining Phase

1. Slope Inclination: Since there are no topsoil over the Charnockite during mining phase,



there is no risk.

2. Soil Stratigraphy: No soil cover on the slope

3. Seepage from slope face: No seepage as there are no overlying secondary debris on

the weathered surface

4. Slope bench: the ultimate slope of bench will be 45o, it is safe as the granite is hard

rock and also there is no stuff to topple stability.

5. Table land drainage: No apparent drainage over the slope. Proper garland drains will

manage the subsurface flow. Hence No risk

6. Previous landslide activity: None - No Risk

Assessment of the above parameters indicate that the mine prospect is stable. Slope

difference in the three profiles (N, middle and S) between the mine prospect and higher

slope east of it indicate a distinct difference in the geomorphic set up between the highest

portion of the geomorphic unit and the prospect west to that.

Mining Phase:

1. After the bench mining the general slope of the top surface will be less than the

slope of this eastern bare ridge ruling out any geo technical instability.

2. The shock of the blasting at the eastern periphery will not affect the ridge as

charnockite is massive and isometric in transmission of shock.

3. The surface water from this elevated zone will be collected along with water

from the mine prospect.

4. Mining is planned to keep a uniform gradient throughout the mining phases. This

gradient is way less than the slope of the ridge mass improving the stability of the

primary stuff.

5. Slope difference in the three profiles (N, middle and S) between the mine prospect

and higher slope east of it indicate a distinct difference in the geomorphic set up

between the highest portion of the geomorphic unit and the prospect west to that.

7.6.6 Rockfall Potential and Other Failure Potentials at Site

Rock fall is the most common type of mass movement on steeper slopes. Rock falls may

also be triggered by rainfall, changes in groundwater conditions, weathering and erosion

of the rock and/or surrounding material. No stability enhancement is not required for

the following reasons.

A. Chances of rock fall is ruled out by the following conditions:

a. Absence of any structural features like faults, joints in the rock strata

b. Absence of any geomorphic features like weathered layering, interface

between secondary rock and crystalline rocks

c. Absence of any rock lumps detached from main rock mass

d. Massive nature of the charnockite ridge.



e. Isometric distribution of the shock

B. Landslide is the second common geomorphic events to consider. Possibility of any

landslide is ruled out by:

a. Absence of debris on the crystalline slope

b. Absence of any sub surface water below the secondary lithotypes

c. Absence of triggering shocks like seismic waves, traffic shocks

d. Proposed blasting will be of zero impact at this distance

e. No scope of flooding

f. No human activity on this ridge

C. Drainage alteration and accelerated erosion is ruled out as:

a. No stream flow on this ridge. Everything is sheet flow

b. Any weathered stuff will roll down the surface

c. Weathering in the charnockite zone is weak

D. Stability Enhancement: No steps for are required as:

a. Ridge is massive with sporadic weatherizing

b. Slope of the lower mining prospect is much gentler while considering this eastern

ridge

c. No vegetation or soil

d. No drainage hence no erosion.

7.7. Traffic Movement and Transportation plan

A Study is conducted to determine the vehicular traffic measures and best possible route for

material transportation from mines to destination points. It is proposed to take the material to

destination, so as to reduce the traffic load on proposed roads due to cluster effect.

Table 7-4 Route of Transportation of Granite Building Stone

Starting point Way Places Destination

Mine

-0km

8m wide

Private Road

Edamuri –

Koothattukulam Road Koothattukulam

End Users Athikkayam –

Vechuchira Road Athikkayam



Figure 7.5 Google image showing Transportation route within 10km radius

7.7.1 Vehicular Traffic Density

The vehicular traffic density survey was carried out on 12/02/2020 for 12 hours on 8m wide

Edamuri -Koothattukulam road (1) and Athikkayam – Vechuchira Road (2). Proposed project

connect with both these roads. The nearby existing quarry of Kavumkal mainly use the

Athikkayam-Vechoochira road for transportation. The Manimalethu Crusher unit is also

connecting with Athikkayam–Vechoochira road with their quarry approach road sharing. The

traffic study on these roads counts the existing traffic due to the existing quarries. Proposed

project will use mainly the Edamuri-Koothattukulam road for truck movement, however the

study consider the load equaly on both roads. The traffic due to the proposed quarry will cause

increase in commercial vehicles as well as heavy trucks as a result traffic load will also increase

on connecting roads. Traffic load play a major role in polluting the air. To assess the traffic

load, 2 numbers of surveyors were appointed.

The vehicles plying on road in both the directions were counted continuously for 12 hours. The

vehicles were counted every hour as stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). There is only

one outlet for the transportation of minerals from proposed site to State Highway.



Figure 7.6 Traffic Density Study Locations

Traffic data collected continuously for 12 hours by visual observation and counting of vehicles

has been carried out under five categories, viz., car, two-wheeler, three-wheeler, buses and

trucks. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under these categories were determined for both

stations in Passenger Car Unit (PCU).

Table 7-5 Standard PCU for Vehicles

*Values of PCU

Car 1

2-Wheeler 0.5

3-wheeler 0.8

Bus/Truck 3.5

The survey results are tabulated in the Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.

Table 7-6 Vehicular Traffic Density Survey Results of Edamuri-Koothattukulam Road

Time Car 2-

Wheeler

3-

wheeler Buses Trucks Total hourly

vehicle capacity in

PCU (V) V/C

8am -9am 16 28 20 1 0 49.5 0.03

9am-10am 22 48 13 2 0 63.4 0.04

10am -11am 20 36 19 2 5 77.7 0.05

11am – 12pm 14 16 25 1 6 66.5 0.04

12pm -01pm 16 19 24 1 8 76.2 0.05



Time Car 2-

Wheeler

3-

wheeler Buses Trucks Total hourly

vehicle capacity in

PCU (V) V/C

01pm -02pm 14 26 26 1 5 68.8 0.04

02pm – 03pm 18 25 27 1 4 69.6 0.04

03pm -04pm 21 36 28 1 3 75.4 0.05

04pm-5pm 22 43 22 2 0 68.1 0.04

05pm- 06pm 22 30 20 2 0 60 0.04

06pm -7pm 19 28 19 2 0 55.2 0.03

7pm -8pm 18 26 10 1 0 42.5 0.03

Total Volume 222 361 253 17 31 Design capacity C = 1500 (for

Rural road, IRC 64, 1990)

Max hourly traffic V= 77.7 PCU

In PCU for 12

hours 222 180.5 202.4 59.5 108.5

PCU per hour 19 15 17 5 9

Table 7-7 Vehicular Traffic Density Survey Results of Athikkayam Vechuchira Road

Time Car 2-

Wheeler

3-

wheeler Buses Trucks

Total hourly

vehicle capacity

in PCU (V) V/C

8am -9am 24 40 37 2 5 98.1 0.06

9am-10am 56 26 45 2 2 119 0.07

10am -11am 70 49 40 1 7 154.5 0.10

11am – 12pm 28 43 25 1 6 94 0.06

12pm -01pm 52 35 28 1 8 123.4 0.08

01pm -02pm 56 45 36 1 5 128.3 0.08

02pm – 03pm 32 41 32 1 4 95.6 0.06

03pm -04pm 85 42 38 1 4 153.9 0.10

04pm-5pm 68 42 31 2 6 141.8 0.09

05pm- 06pm 57 38 29 2 5 123.7 0.08

06pm -7pm 54 42 38 1 8 136.9 0.09

7pm -8pm 43 26 25 1 6 100.5 0.06

Total Volume 625 469 404 16 66 Design capacity C = 1500

(for Rural road, IRC64,

1990)

Max hourly traffic V=

154.5 PCU

In PCU for 12

hours 625 23.45 323.2 56 231

PCU per hour 52 2 27 5 19

From the traffic study results the current maximum hourly traffic volume in the Edamuri-

Koothattukulam road is 77.7 PCU and that of Athikkayam-Vechoochira road is 154.5 PCU per

hour. The implementation of proposed quarry will result in higher traffic volume in both

Edamuri -Koothattukulam road and Athikkayam – Vechuchira Road.



7.7.2 Impacts on Traffic Density

Considering the total production and transportation from the proposed quarry, the estimation

of tippers for transport of the material is estimated as given in the Table 7-6. The nearby quarry

of Johnson Rocks is currently not working, but expecting in near future. As per their proposed

production, the traffic volume expecting is also calculated. It is also taken into account for the

safety check on the service of road.

Table 7-8 Estimation of Tippers for Transport for the proposed Quarry

Particulars Proposed quarry of

Kavumkal

Johnson Rocks

(Proposed)

Maximum Annual Production

Capacity (MT) 185637.8 1,00,000

No of Working days 250 250

Production in a day (MT) 742.55 400

No of tippers/trucks per day (15 MT

capacity) 49-50 27

No of tippers per 1 hour – @8hours a

day working 7 4

Traffic Volume in PCU/hour 25 14

Total additional traffic expecting 39

From the above table, it can be seen that the total number of trucks for transport of the building

stone will be 50 trips / day (max) for the proposed quarry. Considering the proposed quarry,

the traffic volume may increase by 25 PCU/hour for both roads in addition to the existing

traffic. And due to the implementation of Johnson Rocks, the addition of 14PCU/hour in the

traffic. Hence total 39PCU/hour is estimated as traffic load due to proposed project.

Table 7-9 Impact in Traffic Density

Traffic Density

Existing

Condition After implementation of Quarry

Level of

Service

(LOS) V V/C V’

Anticipated

V/C

Max Hourly traffic in

Edamuri -

Koothattukulam road

77.7 0.05 1.1x77.7+39 =

124.5 0.08 A (Excellent)

Maximum Hourly

traffic in Athikkayam

– Vechuchira Road

154.5 0.1 1.1x154.5+39=

209 0.20 A (Excellent)

*one trips of truck = 3.5PCU additional & considering 10% increase in general traffic

10% increase traffic density was anticipated for Car, Two-wheeler, three-wheeler and Buses.

And the Level of Service is excellent and good for both roads. The road is safe for the additional

traffic.



7.7.3 Mitigation on Traffic Density

• Adequate control measures will be taken for the safe mode of transportation.

• The peak hours will be avoided for the transportation.

• School Traffic time will strictly avoid for the Quarry truck movement.

• Speed limit of 40km/hr on Quarry Access Road.

• All heavy vehicles travelling to or from the quarry must not travel over 60km/h between

the quarry and the State Highway

7.8 Drainage Management

There are no seasonal streams within the leasehold area. The seasonal streams could be seen

outside the leasehold area towards south, southwest and northwest side of the lease. The

rainwater draining from the hill slopes and the slopes in the study area carries the silt and

pebbles, which ultimately settles at the connecting streams/river. The proposed area having

gently slopy terrain with slope towards the western side. The proposed garland drains at the

higher elevation will divert the entry of water flow away from the mine. The surface runoff

from the quarry area will collect and divert using garland drains and with help of silt traps and

delay tanks the overflow will connect to nearby natural drains. The slope of adjust quarries is

towards east and northeast direction since the proposed quarry is in the opposite phase of the

hill terrain. Hence the chance of cumulative impact on the drainage is minimum.

Figure 7.7 Drainage management at the site



Figure 7.8 Drainage Management Plan of Quarry



7.8 Mine Waste Management

During the first five-year mining plan period the building stone shall be mined after recovery

of the soil, which overlain the granite building stone.

Figure 7.9 Location of Soil dumping area in Quarry

Topsoil Management

A total quantity of 90585 tonnes of topsoil and 92819 tonnes of Overburden (OB) will be

generated with in the proposed site, has to be removed during the mining operations. The

topsoil/OB excavated from the quarry will be dumped separately at predetermined place and

subsequently will be utilized in spreading over reclaimed areas for plantation. Precautions will

be taken to limit the height of the topsoil dump to 5 to 6 m in order to preserve its fertility and

shelf life. It will be suitably protected from soil erosion and infertility by planting fodder grass

and leguminous plants during temporary storage.

The anticipated impacts are:

• Run off from mine with loose soil and loss of vegetation.

• Impact on surrounding agricultural land



• Impact on groundwater quality due to leachate.

Therefore, conservation and protection of topsoil is crucial. The best practices involved in the

topsoil management are as follows;

• Scrap the topsoil prior to drilling and blasting.

• Scraped topsoil should be used immediately for the plantation work.

• If topsoil is not used immediately then it should be staked at designated area.

• Stacked topsoil area should be surrounded by embankment (2-3 m height of retaining

wall) to prevent erosion.

• Height of stacking should not exceed more than six meters.

• Drainage should be considered to handle heavy rainfall.

• Stacked topsoil should be stabilized further by grasses and bush to protect from the

wind.

• Sedimentation tanks should be constructed to treat run-offs

• The individual dump of soil should have maximum slope of 37o and an overall slope

not exceed 32o.

• The soil dump shall have retaining wall at the foot of dump.

• A garland drain shall be made at higher elevation to divert the storm water flow away

from dump.

• The mine waste (soil) management shall be as per the approved mine plan Coir mating

will be done on the dump surface to control the dust emission.



Chapter 8. PROJECT BENEFITS

The proposed building stone quarry project of M/s Kavumkal Granites is private owned land

and is allotted for mining activities on lease basis.

8.1 Improvement in Social Infrastructure

It is proposed that the socio-economic development work in the nearby area will be carried out

by M/s Kavumkal Granites to strengthen the social infrastructural needs of the villagers like

education, medical, drinking water for human beings and animals, road network, plantation,

etc. Direct employment will be generated due to mine operations and preference would be

given to the nearby villagers as per their qualification/experience, indirect self-employment

will be generated due to the proposed mining project.

Following measure will be taken to improve the Social infrastructure of the study area:

➢ Preventive medical care and educational facilities for rural population will be promoted.

➢ Priority will be given to local people for employment.

➢ Extending general benefit by way of development work in the villages through

respective Gram Panchayat.

➢ Development of Infrastructures, Educational, Health facilities and other CER project

works in the local area in consultation with Local Self-Government (LSG’s).

➢ Supplementing Govt. efforts in health monitoring camps, social welfare and various

awareness programs among the rural population.

➢ Assisting social forestry program.

➢ Financial support for solar energy harvesting and application of Solar Energy.

➢ Support and use of Solar energy for lighting and other purposes in surrounding villages

(Athikkayam, Pathanamthitta District).

8.2 Employment Potential

➢ The project would generate direct and indirect employment and preference will be

given to the locals. About 20 persons will get direct employment in the mine and also

this project would generate equal or more number of indirect employments.

➢ The local economy will receive a boost due to employee spending and services

generated by the mining operation. The overall effect will improve the buying power

of employees and the standard of living of people viz. better education, improved health

and sanitation facilities, housing and acquisition of consumer durable.

➢ Migration into the existing area will be insignificant and no displacement of the existing

population will take place due to the establishment of the proposed project. Housing;

transport; water and power supply; medical, educational and other civic amenities will

get a boost in future.



8.3 Corporate Environment Responsibility

The project proponent will incorporate the CER activities in consultation with stakeholders and

local governed bodies, and will implement in the first two years for mining and for the

remaining period the maintenance of inventoried activities will be maintained. The objective

is to obtain a social license from the stakeholders who are likely to be affected due to the

proposed mine lease area if there is any such case.

8.4 Tax Income

The proposed capital expenditure of the proposed mining activity is Rs. 2.225 crores. The

provision of employment also directly contributes to additional income tax and also indirectly

contributes to additional GST due to various transactions. The operation of the project also

results in additional GST and State by way of royalty, taxes and duties.



Chapter 9. ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.1. Introduction

Appendix-III of EIA Notification, 2006 (Generic Structure of Environmental Impact

Assessment Document), states that "Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis" is to be elaborated

in the EIA report provided such a study is mandated by the Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC)

/ State Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) at the scoping stage of the proposal. In the instant

project, since the EAC has not prescribed for such a study during the scoping stage and hence

not part of the approved ToR.



Chapter 10.

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 Introduction

This chapter deals with the description of administrative aspects of ensuring the mitigative

measures proposed for the significant impacts identified in Chapter 4 due to the mining

activities on each face of environment viz. Air Environment, Noise Environment, Land

Environment, Water Environment, Ecological Environment and Socio-economic Environment.

The EMP comprises a series of components covering direct mitigation and environmental

monitoring, an outline waste management plan and a project site restoration plan. Therefore,

EMP has been prepared for each of the above developmental activities.

10.2 Environment Management System

The M/s Kavumkal Granites will adopt Environmental Management System (EMS) which will

assist mine management to meet both current and future environmental requirements and

challenges. EMS will provide a structural view and control of the organization's environmental

performance that will be applied from planning and exploration to the mine closure.

The following components are being taken to establish an EMS; Organizational Commitment,

Environmental Policy, Environmental Impact Assessment, Objectives and Targets,

Environmental Management Plan (EMP), Documentation, Responsibilities and Reporting

Structure, Training, Environmental Review Audits and Emission and performance monitoring.

The mine management will follow a comprehensive and systematic health and safety function

which involves all personnel seeking to identify hazards and assessing risk to prevent and

eliminate all accidents/ injuries. The management will prepare a detailed eco-restoration and

mine closure plan of mine operation prior to the commencement of the mine operation.

10.3 Environment Policy

In order to protect environment and for sustainable development, an Environmental Policy will

be adopted by Lessee as follows:

"Environment, Health, Safety and Quality (EHSQ) Policy"

We, M/s Kavumkal Granites, driven by our core values and beliefs are committed to our

stakeholders and meet customer satisfaction through integrated.

EHSQ management system to achieve sustainability, in all our existing and future businesses.

To attain this objective, we shall: -

• Implement and maintain an integrated EHSQ management system to achieve

sustainable performance.

• Adopt and sustain a Business Excellence framework for continual business process

improvement.



• Protect Environment, conserve natural resources, reduce energy consumption, improve

occupational health and safety performance and mitigate risks by adopting optimal

production processes and services, driven by environment friendly technologies.

• Comply and endeavour to exceed all applicable legal and other requirements.

• Continuously strive to achieve satisfaction of all stakeholders through contribution to

social development.

• Communicate effectively about the EHSQ system and create awareness and increase

the competency of all employees through training.

• Establish specific organizational structure for guidance, implementation and regular

review of EHSQ management system.

Responsibility

The Environmental Officer is responsible for maintaining ecological balance by adequate

environmental protection and environment improvement works. In the event of observation of

non-compliance by any employee, the same is informed by the Environmental Officer to the

mine manager. These three will identify the cause and implement the mitigation measures or

engineering controls or work practices required. The Environmental Officer will monitor the

environmental performance and guide the Mines manager and the employees for maintaining

good environmental practices and to adopt newer, safe and cleaner technologies.

10.4 Environment Management Measures

The environment management measures of a project detailed the mitigation measures to be

adopted to minimize various environment impacts, expected, so as to ensure low impact due to

the project to the surrounding environment. This will ensure sustainable development and

environment friendly mining operations. The EMP for various aspects of environment are

follows under:

10.4.1 Air Pollution Control Measures

Mining activities will generate certain quantities of dust during drilling, blasting, loading and

transportation operations. The following measures will be taken to mitigate the fugitive dust

from these operations.

● Laying of haul road as per the standards, black topping of permanent haul road and

service road to avoid or eliminate air – borne dust.

● To avoid the dust generation from the drilling operations, wet drilling method will be

adopted.

● Drilling machines will be equipped with water spraying system to prevent dust to get

air borne

● Use of appropriate explosives for blasting and avoiding overcharging of blast holes.

● Controlled blasting techniques will be adopted.

● Watering of haul road and other road at regular intervals.



● Provision of dust filters / mask to workers for highly dust prone and affected areas.

● Provision of green belt all along the periphery of the lease area.

● Periodical monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the lease area.

The extracted mineral will be transported from the quarry to the end users by adopting

following measures so as to minimize dust emissions.

● In case of long transportation, the trucks after loading will be covered with tarpaulin

sheets.

● Speed of the vehicles will be maintained within the prescribed limits.

● Trucks will not be overloaded and will be maintained to the body level.

10.4.2 Noise Control Measure

The main sources of noise in the project area are Drilling, Blasting, Compressors, Vehicular

movements and Loading & unloading of materials.

The following noise control measures are undertaken to bring down the noise levels: -

● Proper maintenance of machinery, equipment and improvement on design of machines.

● Use of personal protective devices i.e., earmuffs and earplugs by workers, who are

working in high noise generating areas.

● Creation of wide green belt of dense foliage between mine areas and residential

colonies.

● Regular medical check-up related health problems

● Proper training to personnel to create awareness about adverse noise level effects.

● Planned noise monitoring at suitable locations in the plant and outside location for

proper effective remedial actions.

10.4.3 Vibration and Fly rock Control Measures

In order to reduce the vibration and fly rock, the blasting is proposed to be carried out with

NONEL technology, where the sequence of blast occurs two to three times that too from bottom

of the bench. However, certain preventive measures will be taken to minimize the risks arising

from flying fragments, which are as follows:

• Marking of danger zone: - The area falling within 250 m of the blasting area will be

marked off as danger zone with red flags, or other appropriate signs, and entry of any

unauthorized person into this zone will be prohibited during blasting operation.



• Warning signals: - An audible warning signal will be given, fifteen minutes before

actual firing of blast to enable persons to move out of danger zone. For this purpose, a

set of sirens/ hooters will be provided at appropriate places.

• Providing blasting shelters: - In order to protect the personnel engaged in blasting

operations, blasting shelters will be provided for taking shelter during blasting.

• Optimum delay sequence and stem to column ratio will be maintained to minimize the

fly rock distance and ground vibration intensity

• Usually single/double row of holes is blasted along free face to achieve optimum

powder factor, best fragmentation and minimized adverse impacts on account of

blasting.

• Maximum numbers of holes will be blasted at a time in a round are generally limited to

20 with non – electrical detonators (NONEL) to mitigate adverse impacts such as air

blast, fly rock and ground vibration.

• The Ignition will be the Non-Conventional and Eco-Friendly method by NONEL (Non-

Electric Detonators).

10.4.4 Water Management & Water Pollution Control Measures

A. Domestic Sewage

The domestic sewage generation, if discharged untreated, can contaminate the ground water

and other ground & surface water sources.

The sewage to the tune of 1 kLD will be generated from the project site and the same will be

diverted to the septic tank followed by soak pit.

B. Storm water contamination with silt

Mining activities may cause adverse impacts due to siltation due to runoff/ storm water. An

impact due to soil erosion during monsoon period is also significant in nature. This also has

the potential to clog the water channels and to spoil agriculture.

Some of the control measures adopted for controlling water pollution due to the siltation of

storm water by mining operations are as follows: -

● Storm water drains with silt traps will be suitably constructed all along the periphery of

the pit area (Garland drains) to collect the run-off from the lease area and divert into

the storm water pond/tanks proposed within the complex.

● Appropriate channelization of storm water with channels of sufficient width. All

measures will be taken not to disturb the existing drainage pattern adjacent to the other

property.

● De-siltation traps and storm water collection pond proposed for silt removal.

● The storm water collected from the lease area will be utilized for dust suppression on

haul roads, plantation within the premises, etc.



Construction of check dams and collecting channel all around at the foot of the hill to prevent

soil erosion during the monsoon season and also to collect the storm water for various use

within the mine lease area.

10.4.5 Land Planning

The total mine lease area of 4.0262Ha is private owned land. The present land use and ultimate

stage of mining land use will be as under:

Table 10-1 Land Use pattern of proposed area in Pre operational, Operational & Post

Operational Stages

No. Land Use Pre-Operational (Ha) Operational (Ha) Post Operational

(Ha)

1 Mining area 0.00 2.6409 3.4228

2 Road 0.00 0.0180 0.02

3 Safety and Plantation area 0.000 0.6034 0.6034

4 Virgin Area/ Reclamation

area 4.0262 0.7819

0.00

Total 4.0262 4.0262 4.0262

In order to minimize the adverse effects, the following suggestions have been made.

● Concurrent eco restoration will be carried out. Additional plantation will be provide

within the 0.6034 Ha safety/greenbelt zone, almost 1000nos of trees will be plant at an

interval of 3.m distance.

● Construction of check dams and collecting channel all around at the foot of the hill to

prevent soil erosion during the monsoon season and also to collect the storm water for

various use within the mine lease area.

● Green belt development along the boundary of the lease area.

● It is proposed to reclaim the pit area and this area will be suitably planted with local

species for eco-restoration in all possible means.

● Proper barricading and monitoring of the water stored area will be taken up to prevent

accidents (if any)

● The topsoil will be generated from the proposed pit, which will be properly stacked and

will be utilized for plantation over the reclaimed areas.

10.4.6 Biological Measures

The biological environment within the mining area will entirely change due to the mining

activities. Plantation will be carried out within the greenbelt barrier zone. And at the end of

mining period the total area will be reclaimed with plantation by reusing the initially removed

topsoil from the site. Mainly the local species will be planted along with the other plants such

as Rain tree, Bougainville, Picus, plantation crops like Fruit bearing plants like mango tree,



jack fruit tree will be planted. It is proposed to plant at the rate of 1,000 saplings per hectare.

Anticipated survival growth rate is about 60 – 70 %.

10.4.7 Socio-economic Management

As there are no habitations or settlements in the core zone area, no rehabilitation or resettlement

are involved. The existing environmental scenario in respect of ambient air quality, water

quality, noise levels, water aspects, biological aspects, etc. show that all these environmental

parameters are within the statutorily prescribed levels. As such, impact due to the project will

be positive on socio-economic aspects. It will be ensured that the buffer zone of the mine lease

will be properly preserved environmentally in all respects within sustainable limits through

necessary monitoring. The project will be operated with care for minimizing environmental

impacts with proper EMP measures for pollution control which will be continued in future also.

10.5 Environmental Management Cell (EMC)

Environment Management will be headed by the Environmental officer. The Environmental

Officer shall be responsible for day-to-day monitoring. The monitoring shall be conducted by

NABL accredited laboratory. Also, the Environmental Officer would be monitoring the

performance of pollution control devices proposed and appropriate steps needs to get the

performance of the pollution control devices.

Records shall be maintained for the analysis of pit water and effluents, ambient air quality data

and noise levels etc. These records are not only required for the perusal of the Pollution Control

Board authorities but also to derive at the efficiencies of the pollution control measures as the

objective of the project proponent is not only compliance with statutory regulations, but also a

serious commitment towards clean environment and sustainable mining operations. The

management shall maintain the records as per the EPA regulations and apply for the annual

consents under Air Act and Water Act.

Reporting system provides the necessary feedback for project management to ensure quality of

the mitigation measures and that the management plan in implementation. The rationale for a

reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the measures proposed as part of the

Environmental Management Plan get implemented in the project.

The hierarchy of reporting is that the Environmental Officer will report any noncompliance to

the Mines Manager and to the CEO.

The EMC will supervise the monitoring of environmental pollution levels viz; ambient air

quality, water and effluent quality either departmentally or by appointing external agencies

wherever necessary.

10.6 Structure of the EMC

To monitor noise, air quality and other environmental parameters, NABL accredited laboratory

shall be identified to know the quality of surrounding environment in and around the mine site

as per SPCB/CPCB guidelines and as per consent order. For implementation of Environment

Management Plan, Environment Management Cell is formed under the control of the

Environmental Engineer. The responsibilities of this cell are:



• Implementation of pollution control measures.

• Monitoring program implementation.

• Post-plantation care.

• To check the efficiency of pollution control measures taken.

• Any other activity as may be related to environment

• Seeking expert’s advice when needed.

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

Table 10-2 Proposed Environmental Management Cell

Sl No Member Role

1 Chairman Managing Partner, M/s

Kavumkal Granites

2 Mines manager Member

3 Environmental Engineer Convener

4 Health & Safety Officer Member

5 NABL accredited Company representative Member

6 Representative of NABET accredited

Consultancy

Member

Frequency of Meeting – Once in 3 months

Quarry Owner

MINES MANAGER

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEER

HEALTH & SAFETY

SPECIALIST

SAMPLERS NABL ACCREDITED

COMPANY

HELPERS

SUPERVISORS

HELPERS



10.7 Budget for EMP

The budget of EMP in the mining period is given in Table 10-3. The budget for EMP in the

mining phase is Rs. 22 lakhs.

Table 10-3: Budget for EMP

S

No

Item Funds to be allocated

(in INR)

1 Drinking water facility for the labourers 1,50,000

2 Sanitary arrangement 1,00,000

3 Safety kit 2,00,000

4 Dust control 3,00,000

5 Afforestation etc. 2,50,000

6 CER activities 12,00,000

Total 22,00,000

10.8 Proposed Corporate Environmental Responsibilities

M/s Kavumkal Granites will implement CER activities in the local community around the

project site. The CER schemes are identified to meet the specific needs and requirement of the

concerned group/person of any organization/Institutions. In continuation to the recent OM

No.22- 65/2017-IA.III dated 30/09/2020 and OM No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 20/10/2020 of

the MoEF &CC and considering the concerns raised during the public consultation held on

03/03/2021, as detailed in Annexure No. 10 the project proponent has committed to address

the concerns with respect to CER activities to be taken up and the budget for the same is

provided.

As part of the CER (Corporate Environmental Responsibility) lessee had made a meeting with

Local Social welfare working group as follows:

1. Mohanraj Jacob, Panchayath President, Naranamoozhy Panchayath, Mob:9447028013

2. Ward Member, Naranamoozhy Panchayath, PH: 04735-270228

With reference to the critical aspects of panchayath and sensitive settlements in the region we

had prepared a CER proposal as in the following aspects:

I. PROMOTION OF EDUCATION

A. The project will support in turning two classrooms of GHSS School, Edamuri into hi-

tech class rooms in association with PTA

The Kerala Infrastructure and Technology for Education (KITE), formerly IT@School, has

transformed 33,775 classrooms in the state into hi-tech ones. Under the programme, KITE aims



to provide Information and Communication Technology (ICT) facilities in Classes VIII to XII

of government and aided schools.

Under this programme, all classrooms would be equipped with Digital Interactive Textbooks,

Digital Content Collection for easy learning of all subjects, Resource portal which would

ensure a round-a clock learning atmosphere to all, E-learning / M-Learning / Learning

Management system, evaluation mechanisms in addition to Computers, Multimedia Projector,

Sound System and High Speed internet connection which every student and teacher could make

use of. Each school would feature offline servers hosting educational contents, which would

be connected to classrooms, library and labs. This system would enable a secure and easy

access of contents for the students and teachers. KITE has also developed Samagra Resource

Portal with syllabus based educational contents, to be used in the high-tech classrooms.

GHSS Edamuri is managed by the Department of Education. It is located in Rural area. It is

located in Athikkayam village of Pathanamthitta district of Kerala. The school consists of

Grades from 1 to 10. Total number of room available in the school is 25. There is 30 teaching

staff and 4 non-teaching staff. (Source: Report Generated by IT@School, 2015).

This mining project will support the schools to provide the basic facilities for setting up

classrooms and computer labs to be made Hi-Tech. And also help to ensure that each classroom

and lab has tiled flooring, a secure ceiling in case of tiled roof, locker facilities, shelves and

racks for keeping the equipment, painted clean walls and a secure electrical connection with

enough plug-points.

A need base analysis was done at GHSS Edamuri and we propose to provide funding to turn

two class rooms into hi-tech. The funding is required for the following works:

Summary of activities

Particulars Calculation Total Amount

Tiling of two classrooms (30 x30 ft) 2 x 50000 1,00,000

Add up 4 number of computers to the computer

lab 4 x 25000 1,00,000

Provide shelves of dimension 6 x 6 x 1 ft for each

class room for keeping students accessories 2 x 25,000 50,000

Provide a locker facility for keeping the

equipments and Books for library 2 x 25,000 50,000

Total 3,00,000

II. HEALTH CARE

A. A need base analysis for CER conducted and discussed with LSGD and project

will provide 4 Stainless Steel Commercial RO Water Dispenser with Purifier for

the Govt. Primary Health Centre, Naranamoozhy.



Project will provide 4 Stainless Steel Commercial RO Water Dispenser with Purifier for

the Govt. Health Centre, Naranamoozhy. The purifier has a productivity of 100L/Hr. It has

an option to provide warm, cold and hot purified water outlets.

Particulars Calculation Total Amount Type of

Expense

Provide 4 Water Dispenser with Purifier 50,000 X 4 2,00,000

Non-Recurring Wheel chair and Stretcher for the Health care

unit 2x50,000 1,00,000

TOTAL 3,00,000

III. SOCIAL ASPECTS

A. A need base analysis for CER conducted and discussed with LSGD and the project

will support the 3 families from Athikkayam Village for the renovation of their houses.

Proposed renovations include repairing of damaged roofs and ceilings and also include

provision of clean sanitation system.

Particulars Calculation Total Amount Type of

Expense

Renovation of houses in the

Athikkayam Village (3 Family) 1,00,000 X 3 3,00,000 Non-Recurring

TOTAL 3,00,000

B. The project will help in improve the living condition of Naranamoozhy Panchayath

To provide lighting at night and prevent accidents and to increase the safety, solar LED street

lights will be provided. It uses the solar radiation energy to charge the battery with the solar

panel during day time, and offer energy to the LED light equipment at night. This system has

a double advantage in both utilization of new energy and energy-saving. This project will

provide 5 solar LED Street lights for Naranamoozhy panchayath.

Particulars Total Amount Type of

Expense

Will provide Solar LED Street Lights 5x20,000 Non-Recurring

TOTAL 1,00,000

C. Providing waste bins for waste management in association with Naranamoozhy

Panchayath.

Waste bins will be provided in the residential areas and segregation will be done at the initial

stage itself by giving color coded bins.



Particulars Total Amount Type of Expense

Provide waste bins 10x10,000 Non-Recurring

TOTAL 1,00,000

Table 10-4 Summary Of Cer Activities Proposed For Next 2 Years


1

Promotion of Education –

Project will support

improvement of infra-

structural facilities of Govt.

School Edamuri

School renovation

Classroom tiling 1,00,000

3,00,000

Projector & computer 1,00,000

Shelves and Racks 50,000

locker facility for keeping

the equipments and

Books for library

50,000

2

The project will be

implemented for welfare of

Promotion of Health care

units in.

Water Dispenser with

Purifier 2,00,000

3,00,000 Wheel chair &

Stretcherfor patients

1,00,000

3

Improvement of Social

Aspects

All Activities will be

carried out through LSGD

House renovation works 3,00,000

5,00,000

Solar Led streetlights 1,00,000

Waste management

System (Provision of

waste bins)

1,00,000

Total Rs.

11,00,000

The consent form the beneficiary for above mentioned activities is obtained (Annexure 11)

and it will be done during the first 2 years of validity period of the EC and the remaining

validity period will be used to ensure that the maintenance of the interventions are undertaken.

The proponent allocated Rs 11 Lakhs for the CER activities and an extra Rs. 1 Lakh for the

maintenance purposes.

The total funds allocated for the CER activities = Rs 12 Lakhs



Chapter 11. Summary and Conclusion

11.1 Introduction

M/s. Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s Kavumkal Granites, had applied for the mining

of Granite Building Stone, situated in Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2 (Re-

Sy.32) at Athikkayam Village, Ranny Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State for an area

of 4.0262 Ha. The land for mining is owned private and is a fresh quarrying area. The proposed

mining activities will be carried out with mine lease accorded by Mining and Geology

Department, Govt. of Kerala for the said area with average annual production of 185637.8

MTA. The expected life of mine is about 10 years. The average estimated cost of the project is

Rs. 2.225 Crores. The project is expected to employ about 20 persons.

11.2 Project Description

The details of the proposed expansion are given in Table 11-1

Table 11-1 Salient features of the proposed expansion

Sl

No Item Details

1 Name of project M/s. Granite Building Stone Quarry of M/s

Kavumkal Granites

2 Project location

Sy. Nos 781/1/28-17-1 (Re-Sy.32), 781/1/28/-17-2

(Re-Sy.32)

Athikkayam Village,

Ranny Taluk,

Pathanamthitta

3 Applicant & Designation Mr. Kuriakose Sabu

(Managing Partner)

4

Address and contact details

of the applicant




Contact No: +91 9447045949, +91 9495945949,

Email id: [email protected]

5

Name, contact number &

address of Environmental

Consultant


A QCI-NABET Accredited Environmental Consulting

Organization

201, DDA Local Shopping Centre,

E-Block, Vikaspuri,

New Delhi- 110018, INDIA.

+91-11-45118929, 28542059, 28541045

Email: [email protected]

Website: www.sbaenviro.in



6 Nature of Project Granite- Building Stone Quarry

7 Extent of Lease area (Ha) Private Land– 4.0262 Ha

8 Category of Project

B1

(as per F No L-11011/175/2018-I A- II (M) dated

12th December 2018 issued by MoEF&CC)

9 Production Capacity & Life

of Quarry

Maximum annual production -185637.8 MT

Mineable reserves : 1856378 MT

Life of Mine About : 10 years

10 GPS Co-ordinate Latitude (N): 9°24'54.46"N 9°25'3.39"N

Longitude (E): 76°50'21.19"E to 76°50'28.83"E

11 Project site & Topo Sheet

No Athikkayam Village, 58C/15

12 Topography of land and

elevation

The highest elevation of the lease area is 355 m MSL

and lowest is 270 m MSL. The proposed area is

hillock and the drainage of the lease area is towards

SW.

13 New / Expansion /

Modernization New- non coal mining proposal

14 Project Cost Rs. 2,22,50,000

Description of Operations

The proposed method of mining will be Semi mechanized open cast mining. The basic mining

techniques adopted will be uses of machines. For the systematic working of open cast mines,

the main development work will be the forming of systematic benching. The height of bench

will not be kept more than 5.0m at a time and the width of the benches will be always kept safe

according to provisions. The Mining will be done with the help of tools such as drills, jack-

hammer, compressors, hand shovel, picks, excavators etc. The targeted average annual

production of Stone is about 185637.8 MTA.

The process flow chart of quarrying operation is shown in Figure 11.1.



Figure 11.1: Process Flow Chart

11.3 Baseline Environmental Studies

Field monitoring studies have been carried out by M/s. Envirodesigns Eco Labs to evaluate the

baseline status of the project site during the period of January 2020 to March 2020, covering

winter season.

Meteorology

The recorded meteorological data during study period winter season-2020 has been processed

for calculating the monthly averages and presented in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2 Summary of the Meteorological Data generated at Site

Month Temperature (0C) Avg.Relative Humidity

(%)

Avg. Wind

Speed(m/s)

Max Min Avg Max Min Avg Max Min Avg.

JAN 32.2 22.78 27.7 100 62 78.11 5.4 0 1.96

FEB 32.22 23.89 28.8 100 48 74.26 5.36 0 2.25

MAR 33.89 25 29.67 94 46 70.65 6.26 0 2.40

Removal of Top soil/ Overburden

Excavation by Drilling and Blasting

Rock Breaking & Transportaion

Stacking

Dispatch



➢ Air Quality

To establish the baseline status of the ambient air quality in the study area, the air quality was

monitored at 4 locations during the study period. The results of the monitored data indicate that

the ambient air quality of the region in general is in conformity with respect to norms of the

National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),

with present level of activities and also it infers that the air quality levels in the study area are

of fairly good quality.

➢ Water Quality

The baseline groundwater quality status in the region is established by analysing of 2 ground

water and 1 surface water samples. All the parameters of ground water (open well) are within

the standards as per IS:10500. All the parameters surface water is within the standards as per

IS:2296, 1982

➢ Noise Environment

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at 4 locations in the

study area. The noise levels ranged between 50.6 to 53.1 dB (A) during day time and noise

levels ranged between 40.4 to 42.3 dB (A) during night time.

➢ Ecology and Biodiversity

The dominant tree species found in the study sites are Hevea brasiliensis, Macaranga peltate,

Cochlospermum sps, Artocarpus hirsutus, Cocus nucifera, Gliciridia sepium, Mangifera indica,

Xylia xylocarpa, Artocarpus heterophyllus, Swietenia macrophylla, Anacardium occidentale,

Areca catechu, Dalbergia latifolia and Caryota urens. The area around the proposed site within

2 km is basically rubber plantation, so that Hevea brasiliensis showing dominance. The

proposed quarry mining might not create much impact on both floral and faunal diversity of

the proposed site. A very large area is already excavated from the existing quarry near the

proposed site. Vegetation exists only near to the adjoining areas of the existing quarry. Both

rubber plantation and natural vegetation exists near the excavating quarry. Water body can be

seen near the excavating quarry. There is a proper road facility to the proposed site which can

support all the transportation needs, as already a working quarry exists near the site. The area

is already disturbed due to the ongoing mining activity.

➢ Socio Economics

The proposed project extending over 4.0262 Hectares, the project site is located in Athikkayam

Village, Ranni Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, Kerala State. The total Population of

Athikkayam Village 9548 and number of households’ village wise are 2477 as per 2011 census

records.

11.4 Anticipated Environment Impacts and Management

11.4.1 Air Environment

Anticipated potential impacts



● Drilling

● Blasting

● Transportation

Apart from the mining operations of drilling & blasting, movement of vehicles like dumpers,

trucks, tankers etc. will generate dust. The transportation activities on unpaved area will results

in fugitive emission.

Mitigation measures:

Mining activities will generate certain quantities of dust during drilling, blasting, loading and

transportation operations. The following measures will be taken to mitigate the fugitive dust

from these operations.

● Laying of haul road as per the standards, black topping of permanent haul road and

service road to avoid or eliminate air – borne dust.

● To avoid the dust generation from the drilling operations, wet drilling method will be

adopted.

● Drilling machines will be equipped with water spraying system to prevent dust to get

air borne

● Use of appropriate explosives for blasting and avoiding overcharging of blast holes.

● Controlled blasting techniques will be adopted.

● Watering of haul road and other road at regular intervals.

● Provision of dust filters / mask to workers for highly dust prone and affected areas.

● Provision of green belt all along the periphery of the lease area.

● Periodical monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the lease area.

The extracted mineral will be transported from the quarry to the destinations by adopting

following measures so as to minimize dust emissions.

● In case of long transportation, the trucks after loading will be covered with tarpaulin

sheets.

● Speed of the vehicles will be maintained within the prescribed limits.

● Trucks will not be over loaded and will be maintained to the body level.

11.4.2 Noise Environment


The main sources of noise in the project area are

● Drilling

● Blasting

● Compressors

● Vehicular movements

● Loading & unloading of materials

Mitigation measures

The following noise control measures are undertaken to bring down the noise levels: -

● Proper maintenance of machinery, equipment and improvement on design of machines.



● Use of personal protective devices i.e., earmuffs and earplugs by workers, who are

working in high noise generating areas.

● Creation of wide green belt of dense foliage between mine areas and residential

colonies.

● Regular medical check-up related health problems

● Proper training to personnel to create awareness about adverse noise level effects.

● Planned noise monitoring at suitable locations in the plant and outside location for

proper effective remedial actions.

11.4.3 Water Environment

A. Domestic Sewage


The domestic sewage generation, if discharged untreated, can contaminate the ground water

and other ground & surface water sources.


The sewage to the tune of 0.8 kLD will be generated from the site and the same will be diverted

to the septic tank followed by soak pit.

B. Storm water contamination with silt


Mining activities may cause adverse impacts due to siltation due to runoff/ storm water. An

impact due to soil erosion during monsoon period is also significant in nature. This also has

the potential to clog the water channels and to spoil agriculture.


Some of the control measures adopted for controlling water pollution due to the siltation of

storm water by mining operations are as follows:-

● Storm water drains with silt traps will be suitably constructed all along the periphery of

the pit area (Garland drains) to collect the run-off from the mining area and divert into

the storm water pond/tanks proposed within the complex.

● Appropriate channelization of storm water with channels of sufficient width. All

measures will be taken not to disturb the existing drainage pattern adjacent to the other

property.

● De-siltation traps and storm water collection pond proposed for silt removal.

● The storm water collected from the mining area will be utilized for dust suppression on

haul roads, plantation within the premises, etc.

Construction of check dams and collecting channel all around at the foot of the hill to prevent

soil erosion during the monsoon season and also to collect the storm water for various use

within the mine area.

11.4.4 Land Environment



The total mine area of 4.0262 Ha is private owned land. The present land use and ultimate stage

of mining land use will be as Table 10-1 (Chapter 10):

In order to minimize the adverse effects, the following suggestions have been made.

● Concurrent eco restoration will be carried out. Additional plantation will be provide

within the 0.6034 Ha safety/greenbelt zone, almost 1000nos of trees will be plant at an

interval of 3.m distance.

● Construction of check dams and collecting channels all around at the foot of the hill to

prevent soil erosion during the monsoon season and also to collect the storm water for

various use within the mine area.

● Green belt development along the boundary of the mining area.

● It is proposed to reclaim the pit area and this area will be suitably planted with local

species for eco-restoration in all possible means.

● Proper barricading and monitoring of the water stored area will be taken up to prevent

accidents (if any)

● The topsoil will be generated from the proposed pit, which will be properly stacked and

will be utilized for plantation over the reclaimed areas.

In the mine closure stage, water body will be formed in the quarried void from the mine floor

level. Ultimately, out of 4.0262 Ha of mined out area, 3.4228 Ha will be reclaimed with bench

plantation. Since the mine area is a sloping terrain it is suggested to construct a retaining wall

and garland drain at the Toe of the hill on the southern side of the ML area. This will help to

retain the roll of rocks if any down wards. Besides, silted water if any will be collected in the

garland drain will flow into the settling pond. Supernatant clear water will be let out of the area

after passing through silt traps. Besides, the peripheral safety zone will also be developed with

plantation. The mined area will be properly fenced all around. The rainwater falling in the

quarry will be harvested. This pit will act as a settling pond to prevent solids escaping along

with discharge, before outlet etc. Besides, it is also suggested to construct a settlement pond

outside the mining area on the Southern side so that the water can be diverted into this pond.

11.4.5 Socio-economic Environment

As there are no habitations or settlements in the core zone area, no rehabilitation or resettlement

are involved. The existing environmental scenario in respect of ambient air quality, water

quality, noise levels, water aspects, biological aspects, etc. show that all these environmental

parameters are within the statutorily prescribed levels. As such, impact due to the project will

be positive on socio-economic aspects. It will be ensured that the buffer zone of the mine lease

will be properly preserved environmentally in all respects within sustainable limits through

necessary monitoring. The project will be operated with care for minimizing environmental

impacts with proper EMP measures for pollution control which will be continued in future also.

The quarrying operation will result in direct employment opportunities for about 20 persons.

Because of such employment prospects and enhancement of income levels of local community,

their lifestyle, conditions of living, educational and health status, etc. will considerably

improve. Besides, there are also benefits to the State and the Central governments through

financial revenues by way of royalty, tax, duties, etc. from this project directly and also

indirectly. From the above details, it is clear that the project operations will have highly

beneficial CER Activities.



11.5 Analysis of Alternatives

The building Stone Quarry (Minor Mineral) project of M/s Kavumkal Granites is situated at

Athikkayam Village, Ranni Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, and Kerala for an area of 4.0262

hectares. There is a large mineral reserve of Granite building stone within the area. The granite

building stone mineral produced from this area will be mainly used for the upcoming

infrastructure projects in the district. The targeted average annual production of mine will be

185637.8 MTA. The expected life of mine estimated will be about 10 years. The mining

operation will be carried out by opencast mechanized method as per the approved Mining Plan.

Alternative Technology

Type of mining is contingent on geological, topographical conditions of the proposed mine

area, type of mineral and product ion capacity envisaged.

The mining activity proposed as stone boulders mining with an annual capacity of 185637.8

MT. The extraction capacity is high, and manual method is ruled out. The proposed mining

method is for extraction of mineral and ROM is opencast mechanized with drilling and blasting.

Bench height and width will be maintained as 5 meters. Blast holes of 1.0 to 1.50m depth will

be drilled with help of 32mm drill rod, Jack hammer and Air Compressor of 100 cfm capacity.

Loading of blasted material is proposed with 2.5 cum bucket capacity excavator in dumpers of

15 tons capacity. Topsoil shall be removed separately and stored at the place earmarked for it

and used for green belt development.

Alternative Site

The mineral exploration of minor mineral in the proposed mine area is facilitated by the lease

of the land by Government of Kerala. The project is mineral specific and there is abundance of

the mineral in the proposed mine area.

The proposed mine area is however found to be away from any ecologically sensitive /

protected areas. There are no archaeological, historical, cultural or defence installations within

10 km from the mine lease boundary. There is no national park and wildlife

sanctuary/ecologically sensitive area within 10 km from the mine lease boundary. The

proposed mine area is not part of any flood plain nor in the land slide vulnerable zone as per

the hazard zonation map published by State Disaster Management Authority. The nearest

habitation is at 208 m apart. from the boundary of the pit area. Due to the above-mentioned

reasons, there is no need for alternative site.

11.6 Environmental Monitoring Program

Monitoring shall be carried out at the locations to assess the environmental health in the post

construction period. A post study monitoring programme is important as it provides useful

information on the following aspects.



• It helps to verify the predictions on environmental impacts presented in this study.

• It helps to indicate warnings of the development of any alarming environmental situations,

and thus, provides opportunities for adopting appropriate control measures in advance.

Detailed monitoring plan is given in Table 6-1 of Chapter-6.

11.7 Project Benefits

Improvement in Social Infrastructure

The granite building stone mineral produced from this area will be used for construction of

buildings& roads. Mineral will be transported by trucks / tippers to the end users. It is proposed

that the socio-economic development work in the nearby area will be carried out by the mine

management to strengthen the social infrastructural needs of the villagers like education,

medical, drinking water for human beings and animals, road network, plantation, rain water

harvesting etc. Direct employment will be generated due to mine operations and preference

would be given to the nearby villagers as per their qualification/experience, indirect self-

employment will be generated due to the proposed mining project.

Employment Potential

➢ The project would generate direct and indirect employment and preference will be

given to the locals. About 20 persons will get direct employment in the mine and also

this project would generate equal or a greater number of indirect employments.

➢ The local economy will receive a boost due to employee spending and services

generated by the mining operation. The overall effect will improve the buying power

of employees and the standard of living of people viz. better education, improved health

and sanitation facilities, housing and acquisition of consumer durable.

➢ Migration into the existing area will be insignificant and no displacement of the existing

population will take place due to the establishment of the proposed project. Housing;

transport; water and power supply; medical, educational and other civic amenities will

get a boost in future.

Corporate Environment Responsibility

The Office Memorandum (OM) dated 01-05-2018 Notified by Ministry of Environment &

Forests, states that every green field project having capital investment under Rs. 100 crores

need to allocate 2% of its project cost (capital investment) for activities under Corporate

Environment Responsibility (CER). The instant project is a Greenfield project and its capital

investment is Rs. 2.225 crores. Therefore, the project has to spend an amount of Rs. 4.5 lakhs

under CER in the surrounding villages. However, the project proponent has set apart an amount

of Rs. 7 lakhs (about 5.5% of the project cost, more than the mandatory requirement to carry



out CER activities. The objective is to obtain a social license from the stake holders who are

likely to be affected due to the proposed mine area.

11.8 Environment Management Plan

The EMP lists all the requirements to ensure effective mitigation of every potential biophysical

and socio-economic impact identified in the EIA. For each attribute, or operation, which could

otherwise give rise to impact, the following information is presented:

• A comprehensive listing of the mitigation measures

• Parameters that will be monitored to ensure effective implementation of the action

• Timing for implementation of the action to ensure that the objectives of mitigation are

fully met

The EMP comprises a series of components covering direct mitigation and environmental

monitoring, an outline waste management plan and a project site restoration plan. Therefore,

environmental management plan has been prepared for each of the above developmental

activities.

Detailed Environment Management Plan is given in Chapter 10.

11.9 Schedule and Cost of the proposed project

Table 11-3 Likely date of start of production and likely date of completion

Sl

No Particulars of

Time Schedule (in Month)

Remark

1-3 4th- 5th

1 Environmental Clearance

from SEIAA

2 Consent To operate from

statutory bodies

Production Start Period

*schedule plan may vary; subjected to rules & regulation / & other unforeseen

circumstances

Project cost

The estimated total cost of the project is Rs.2.225 Crores.

● Land Cost

● Cost of the machinery

● Additional preliminary works

● Working capital i.e., for the Application and processing fee, etc.



All the minerals shall be marketed. The machinery is of the company and additional

requirement if any shall be on hire basis as per the requirement for production.

11.10 Other Aspects

For effective management and control of adverse impacts,

• The recommendations as per the mining plan will be followed.

• The recommendations under the explosive license will be followed.

• The Hazardous Waste Management and Handling Rules will be followed.

• The Recommendations as per "Consent to Operate" will be followed.

• All conditions in stipulated in the existing Environmental Clearance Order will be

followed.

• All conditions in all statutory approvals will be followed

• With the effective management and mitigation measures as detailed in this report, the

project will be beneficial locally and regionally.



Chapter 12. Disclosure of Consultants Engaged

12.1. Environmental Consultant

This EIA report is prepared on behalf of the proponent, Mr. Kuriakose Sabu, Managing Partner

of M/s. Kavumkal Granites, taking inputs from proponent’s management team and other staff

by the environmental Consultant, “M/s. SBA ENVIRO Environmental Consultancy and

Laboratory”. The head office of SBA ENVIRO is at New Delhi and has branch offices at Kochi,

Pune, Delhi and Kolkata.

M/s SBA ENVIRO not only gives environmental solutions for sustainable development, but

make sure that they are economically feasible. A team of more than hundred environmental

brigadiers consists of engineers, experts, ecologists, hydrologists, geologists, socio-economic

experts, solid waste and hazard waste experts apart from environmental media sampling and

monitoring experts and management experts, strive hard to serve the clients with up to mark

and best services. M/s SBA ENVIRO offers environmental consultancy services to assist its

clients to obtain environmental clearance for their infrastructure, building construction, Coastal

Regulation Zone (CRZ), Special Economic Zone (SEZ), high rise buildings, township projects

and industries covering sugar and distilleries from respective authorities at the Central or State

Level depending on the category of the project.

The various environmental consultancy services offered by M/s SBA ENVIRO include the

following

• Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies and Environmental Clearance

• Environmental Due Diligence and Audits,

• Environmental Status Reports for ULBs and Environmental Advisor for ULBs

• Water and Wastewater Project consultancy and execution,

• EC Compliances,

• Environmental monitoring and laboratory services

• O&M for ETP/STP

12.2. Credentials of SBA ENVIRO

• NABET, Quality Council of India, Accreditation for 11 project sectors.

• ISO 9001:2008, OSHAS 18001:2008 certified State of the art Environmental Laboratory

and Trained Manpower, recognised by MoEF&CC.

• Environmental Advisor for Municipal Corporations.

• Affiliated to Indian Green Building Council (IGBC), Hyderabad.

• Affiliated to United States Green Building Council (USGBC), US.



• Environmental Consultants for Federation of All India Textile Manufacturing Association

• Environmental Consultants for All India Lead Manufacturing Association.

The NABET accreditation number of SBA ENVIRO is NABET/EIA/1720/SA094 valid upto

31/05/2021. The NABET accreditation details of M/s SBA ENVIRO are given in Table 12-1.

Table 12-1: NABET Accreditation Details of the Environmental Consultant

S No Description Sector as

per

MoEF&CC

Category

1. Mining of minerals including opencast only 1(a) (i) A

2. River Valley projects 1(c) A

3. Thermal Power Plants 1(d) A

4. Metallurgical industries (ferrous & nonferrous) 3 (a) A

5. Leather/skin/hide processing industry 3 (a) B

6. Synthetic organic chemicals industry 5(f) B

7. Industrial estates/parks/complexes areas/export

processing zones (EPZs), Special Economic Zones

(SEZs), Biotech parks, Leather complexes

7 (c) B

8. Highways railways, Transport Terminals, Mass

Rapid transport System.

7(f) A

9. Building & construction projects 8(a) B

10. Townships and Area development projects 8(b) B

11. Food Processing -- --

SBA ENVIRO also provide STP/ETP/WTP project consultancy on turn-key basis apart from

Operation and Maintenance of these projects on annual contract basis. Having its own MoEF

&CC approved and NABL accredited environmental laboratory, M/s SBA ENVIRO provide

laboratory services for monitoring and analysis of various environmental media like air, water,

wastewater, stack, noise and meteorological data to its clients all over India.

12.3. Environmental Impact Assessment Team

The EIA team involved in the preparation of the EIA report for the Proposed Granite Building

Stone Quarry at Athikkayam Village, Ranni Taluk, Pathanamthitta District, is as mentioned in

Table 12-2.



Table 12-2: EIA Team

Details of the EIA study team

Name of the Project Granite building stone Quarry project of M/s Kavumkal

Granites

Name of the Client Mr. Kuriakose Sabu

EIA Coordinator Mr Yamesh Sharma (from January 2020– till date)

Team Member Yamesh Sharma (From January 2020 to till date)

Functional Area Experts Involved

S No Functional Area Name and Signature of the Expert

1

Air pollution

monitoring,

prevention and control

(AP)

Sajjathe Sulthan

2

Water pollution

monitoring, prevention

and control (WP)

Sajjathe Sulthan

3 Land Use and Land

Cover (LU) Vikrant Kumar

4 Geology Nazar Ahammed

5 Ecology and

Biodiversity (EB) Parikshit Gautham

6 Socio economics (SE) S C Barghava

7 Solid and hazardous

(SHW) wastes Sajjathe Sulthan



12.4. Details of the Laboratory

M/s SBA ENVIRO has engaged M/s Envirodesign Eco Labs for conducting the baseline

monitoring for the proposed Quarry project. M/s Envirodesign Eco Labs is recognized by

MoEF&CC, Govt. of India and NABL approved. The period of baseline monitoring was from

January 2020 – March 2020. The details of the laboratory which did the baseline monitoring is

depicted in in Table 12-3.

Table 12-3: Details of the Laboratory engaged for baseline monitoring

Name of the Laboratory Scope of services Accreditation status

Envirodesign Eco Labs

Eco Tower, Janatha Junction,

Palarivattom, Ernakulam,

Kochi - 682 025, Kerala, India

Monitoring and Analysis of:

1.Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring

2.Ground and Surface Water

Quality Monitoring

3.Noise Level Monitoring

and

4.Soil Quality Monitoring

Accredited by NABL,

Certificate No. TC-7114

The validity is extended

for one year up to

22.12.2021

COMPLIANCE TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE EIA REPORT

Documents

Transcript of COMPLIANCE TERMS OF REFERENCE IN THE EIA REPORT